Location via proxy:   [ UP ]  
[Report a bug]   [Manage cookies]                

ML248xA / ML249xA Wideband Peak Power Meter Remote Programming Manual

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 286

ML248xA / ML249xA

Wideband Peak Power Meter

Remote Programming Manual

ML2487A and ML2488A software release 2.00


ML2495A and ML2496A software release 2.00

Originated by Anritsu Ltd., EMD, Stevenage, U.K. P/N: 13000-00163


REVISION: E
CREATED September 2005
COPYRIGHT 2005
ANRITSU
Crossed-out Wheeled Bin Symbol
Equipment marked with the Crossed-out Wheeled Bin Symbol complies with the
European Parliament and Council Directive 2002/96/EC (the “WEEE Directive”) in
European Union.

For Products placed on the EU market after August 13, 2005, please contact your local
Anritsu representative at the end of the product's useful life to arrange disposal in
accordance with your initial contract and the local law.
Warranty
The Anritsu product(s) listed on the title page of this manual is (are) warranted against
defects in materials and workmanship for one year from the date of shipment. Anritsu’s
obligation covers repairing or replacing products that prove to be defective during the
warranty period. Buyers shall prepay transportation charges for equipment returned to
Anritsu for warranty repairs. Obligation is limited to the original purchaser. Anritsu is not
liable for consequential damages.

Limitation of Warranty
The foregoing warranty does not apply to Anritsu connectors that have failed due to
normal wear. Also, the warranty does not apply to defects resulting from improper or
inadequate maintenance by the buyer, unauthorized modification or misuse, or operation
outside of the environmental specifications of the product. No other warranty is expressed
or implied, and the remedies provided herein are the buyer's sole and exclusive remedies.

Trademark Acknowledgments
Adobe Acrobat and Acrobat Reader are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Anritsu is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of
their respective owners.

Notice about Documentation


Anritsu has prepared this manual for use by Anritsu personnel and customers as a guide
for the proper installation and operation of Anritsu equipment and computer programs.
The drawings, specifications, and information contained herein are the property of Anritsu,
and any unauthorized use or disclosure of these drawings, specifications, and information
is prohibited; they shall not be reproduced, copied, or used in whole or in part as the basis
for manufacture or sale of the equipment or software programs without the prior written
consent of Anritsu Limited.

13000-00163 iii
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA

iv 13000-00163
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA

Table of Contents
Warranty................................................................................................................. iii
Limitation of Warranty ............................................................................................ iii
Trademark Acknowledgments................................................................................ iii
Notice about Documentation.................................................................................. iii
Chapter 1. About this Manual........................................................................................1-1

Purpose and Scope of this Manual ............................................................................1-1


Your Comments on this Manual .................................................................................1-1
Software Versions ......................................................................................................1-1
Notification of Software Release ................................................................................1-1
Using this Manual .......................................................................................................1-2
Associated Documentation and Resources ...............................................................1-4
The Quick Reference Tables......................................................................................1-5
Chapter Structure .......................................................................................................1-6
Chapter 2. General Information.....................................................................................2-1

Overview.....................................................................................................................2-1
Controller GPIB Card Setup .......................................................................................2-1
Command Format.......................................................................................................2-1
Controller Termination ................................................................................................2-2
Device Termination.....................................................................................................2-2
Suffix Conventions......................................................................................................2-3
Data I/O Formats ........................................................................................................2-3
Configuration Commands...........................................................................................2-3
Query Commands ......................................................................................................2-4
Data Acquisition Commands ......................................................................................2-4
GPIB 488.2 Status Registers .....................................................................................2-5
Status Byte Register (STB) and Service Request Enable Register (SRE) ..........2-5
Standard Event Registers ....................................................................................2-7
Using the Event Status Bit (ESB) in the Status Byte Register ...................................2-9
Using the Message Available Bit (MAV) in the Status Byte Register.................2-11
GPIB Buffering ...................................................................................................2-11
GPIB on RS232 ........................................................................................................2-12
Serial Remote Operation....................................................................................2-12
Summary of RS232 commands................................................................................2-13

13000-00163 v
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA

Command Mnemonics ............................................................................................. 2-14


Device-Specific Commands – ML248xA / ML249xA Command Set................. 2-14
Chapter 3. IEEE 488.2 Mandatory Commands ............................................................ 3-1
*CLS (Clear GPIB Status Bytes) ......................................................................... 3-2
*ESE (Set Standard Event Status Enable Register) ........................................... 3-2
*ESR? (Standard Event Status Register Query) ................................................. 3-4
*IDN? (Identification Query)................................................................................. 3-4
*OPC (Set Operation Complete Indication)......................................................... 3-5
*RST (Instrument Reset) ..................................................................................... 3-5
*SRE (Service Request Enable Register) ........................................................... 3-6
*STB? (Status Byte Register Query) ................................................................... 3-7
*TRG (Trigger Command) ................................................................................... 3-7
*TST? (Self-test Query Command) ..................................................................... 3-8
*WAI (Wait to Continue) ...................................................................................... 3-8
Chapter 4. GPIB Remote Trigger Commands.............................................................. 4-1
GT0 (Enable Ignore the Group Execute Trigger (GET) Command).................... 4-2
GT1 (Enable 'GET' Command to TR1 Type (Immediate) Trigger) ...................... 4-2
GT2 (Enable 'GET' Command to TR2 Type (Settling Delay) Trigger)................. 4-2
TR0 (Trigger Hold Mode)..................................................................................... 4-2
TR1 (Trigger Immediate) ..................................................................................... 4-3
TR2 (Trigger with Settling Delay) ........................................................................ 4-6
TR3 (Trigger Free Run) ....................................................................................... 4-8
Chapter 5. Channel Commands ................................................................................... 5-1

Setup.......................................................................................................................... 5-6
CHACTIV (Set Active Channel)........................................................................... 5-6
CHCFG (Set Channel Input Configuration) ......................................................... 5-7
CHDISPN (Set Number of displayed channels) .................................................. 5-8
CHMODE (Set Channel Measurement Mode) .................................................... 5-8
CHRES (Set Channel Decimal Point Resolution) ............................................... 5-9
CHUNIT (Set Channel Units)............................................................................. 5-10
CWSETLP (Set Settle Percentage Value) ........................................................ 5-11
PMDTYP (Set Pulsed/Modulated Measurement Display Type) ........................ 5-12
PMMEAS (Set Pulsed/Modulated Measurement Type) .................................... 5-13
Trigger...................................................................................................................... 5-14
PMRRS? (Query RRS Trace State) (ML249xA only) ........................................ 5-14
TRARMD (Set Trigger Arming Mode) ............................................................... 5-14
TRAUTOS (Set Auto-Triggering State) ............................................................. 5-15
TRBW (Set Trigger Bandwidth) ......................................................................... 5-16
TRCAPT (Set Capture Time)............................................................................. 5-17
TRDLYT (Set Trigger Delay Time) .................................................................... 5-18

vi 13000-00163
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA

TRFLEV (Set Trigger Frame Arming Level).......................................................5-19


TRFTIM (Set Trigger Frame Arming Time Duration) .........................................5-20
TRHOFS (Set Trigger Hold-off State) (ML248xA only) ......................................5-21
TRHOFT (Set Trigger Hold-off Time) (ML248xA only) ......................................5-21
TRINEDG (Set Internal Trigger Edge) ...............................................................5-22
TRINLEV (Set Internal Trigger Level) ................................................................5-22
TRLINKS (Set Trigger Linking State) .................................................................5-23
TRSAMPL (Set Sample Rate)............................................................................5-24
TRSRC (Set Trigger Source) .............................................................................5-25
TRWFPOS (Set Trigger Waveform Position).....................................................5-25
TRWFS (Set Trigger Waveform State) ..............................................................5-26
TRXEDG (Set External Trigger Edge) ...............................................................5-26
Gating .......................................................................................................................5-27
GP1REPN (Set Gate Pattern 1 Repeat Number) ..............................................5-27
GP1REPS (Set Gate Pattern 1 Repeat State) ...................................................5-27
GP1REPT (Set Gate Pattern 1 Repeat Offset) ..................................................5-28
GPACTN (Set Active Gating Pattern Number)..................................................5-28
GPAMO (Output Active Gating Pattern Measurement) .....................................5-29
GPARST (Gating Patterns Min/Max Tracking Reset) ........................................5-31
GPFENS (Set Fence Number State) .................................................................5-31
GPFENSP (Set Fence Stop Time).....................................................................5-32
GPFENST (Set Fence Start Time).....................................................................5-32
GPGATS (Set Gate Number State) ...................................................................5-33
GPHIDES (Set Hide Gating Patterns State) ......................................................5-33
GPMO (Output All Enabled Gating Patterns Measurements) ............................5-34
GPNMO (Output Gating Pattern Number Measurement) ..................................5-36
GPOFF (Switch OFF Gating Patterns)...............................................................5-38
GPTIMSP (Set Gate Stop Time) ........................................................................5-39
GPTIMST (Set Gate Start Time) ........................................................................5-39
Relative Measurement..............................................................................................5-40
CWREL (Relative Mode Control) .......................................................................5-40
Averaging .................................................................................................................5-41
CWAVG (Set CW Averaging Mode)...................................................................5-41
PMAVGN (Set Profile Sweep Averaging Number).............................................5-42
PMAVGS (Set Pulsed/Modulated Profile Averaging State) ...............................5-43
PMAVRST (Reset Pulsed/Modulated Profile Averaging)...................................5-43
PMPDRST (Reset Pulsed/Modulated Profile)....................................................5-43
Duty Cycle ................................................................................................................5-44
CWDUTY (Set Duty Cycle Value) ......................................................................5-44
CWDUTYS (Set Duty Cycle State) ....................................................................5-44
Markers.....................................................................................................................5-45

13000-00163 vii
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA

MKACTN (Set Active Marker)............................................................................ 5-45


MKACTO (Output Active Marker Readings)...................................................... 5-46
MKAOFF (Switch All Markers Off ).................................................................... 5-47
MKAPOS (Set Active Marker Position).............................................................. 5-47
MKDELTS (Set Delta Marker Enable State) ..................................................... 5-48
MKDLINK (Set Delta Markers Link State) ......................................................... 5-49
MKDMEAS (Set Delta Marker Measurement Type) .......................................... 5-49
MKDO (Output Delta Marker Readings)............................................................ 5-50
MKDPOS (Set Delta Marker Position)............................................................... 5-51
MKENO (Output All Enabled Markers Readings).............................................. 5-52
MKNO (Output Marker Number Reading) ......................................................... 5-53
MKPFTO (Output Pulse Fall Time).................................................................... 5-54
MKPOS (Set Marker Position)........................................................................... 5-55
MKPOTO (Output Pulse Off Time) .................................................................... 5-56
MKPRIO (Output Pulse Repetition Interval) ...................................................... 5-57
MKPRTO (Output Pulse Rise Time).................................................................. 5-58
MKPSLT (Set Advanced Marker Search Lower Target) ................................... 5-58
MKPSSV (Set Advanced Marker Search Start Value Source).......................... 5-59
MKPSUT (Set Advanced Marker Search Upper Target) ................................... 5-59
MKPWTO (Output Pulse Width) ........................................................................ 5-60
MKSTATE (Set Markers State) ......................................................................... 5-61
MKTMAX (Position Active Marker to Maximum) ............................................... 5-61
MKTMIN (Move Active Marker to Minimum)...................................................... 5-61
Limit Checking ......................................................................................................... 5-62
LMFBEEP (Set Fail Beep Control) .................................................................... 5-62
LMFCLR (Clear Limit Failure Indicator)............................................................. 5-62
LMFHOLD (Set Fail Indicator Hold) .................................................................. 5-63
LMLINE (Set Limit Line Test Type) ................................................................... 5-63
LMSLO (Set Lower Limit Line Value for Simple Limits Checking) .................... 5-64
LMSTATE (Set Limit Checking State) ............................................................... 5-64
LMSUP (Set Upper Limit Line Value for Simple Limits Checking) .................... 5-65
LMTYP (Set Limit Checking Type) .................................................................... 5-65
LMXASTQ (Query All Complex Limits Stores State)......................................... 5-66
LMXNAME (Set Complex Limits Store Name) .................................................. 5-66
LMXPOF (Set Complex Limits Power Offset) ................................................... 5-67
LMXREPN (Set Complex Limits Repeat Count) ............................................... 5-67
LMXREPS (Set Complex Limits Repeat State) ................................................. 5-68
LMXROFP (Set Complex Limits Power Replication Offset) .............................. 5-68
LMXROFT (Set Time Replication Offset) .......................................................... 5-69
LMXSAVE (Save Specification to Complex Limits Store) ................................. 5-69
LMXSEG (Define Complex Limits Segment)..................................................... 5-70
LMXSID (Set Complex Limits Specification ID Header) .................................... 5-71

viii 13000-00163
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA

LMXSPEC (Set Complex Limits Specification Number to Apply) ......................5-72


LMXSPEF (Define Full Complex Limits Specification).......................................5-73
LMXSPO (Output Complex Limits Specification) ...............................................5-75
LMXSTQ (Query Complex Limits Memory Store) ..............................................5-76
LMXTOF (Set Complex Limits Time Offset).......................................................5-77
Scaling......................................................................................................................5-78
PMPAUTO (Autoscale Pulsed/Modulated Profile) .............................................5-78
PMPREF (Set Pulsed/Modulated Profile Reference Level) ...............................5-78
PMPSCAL (Set Pulsed/Modulated Profile Scale) ..............................................5-79
Min/Max ....................................................................................................................5-80
CWMMRST (Reset Min and Max Tracking).......................................................5-80
CWMMTKS (Set Min and Max Values Tracking State) .....................................5-80
Profile Display...........................................................................................................5-81
PMPDREP (Set Pulsed/Modulated Profile Data Representation Type) ............5-81
PMPTRK (Set Pulsed/Modulated Profile Min/Max Tracking Mode) ...................5-82
Meas Hold ................................................................................................................5-83
CHOLD (Set Display Channel Measurement Hold) ...........................................5-83
Peaking Indicator......................................................................................................5-84
CHPIRST (Reset Channel Readout Peaking Indicator).....................................5-84
CHPKS (Set Channel Readout Peak Indicator State) .......................................5-84
Post Processing........................................................................................................5-85
PPACQRT (Restart Post Processing Acquisition) .............................................5-85
PPACQS (Set Post Processing Acquisition State).............................................5-85
PPFUNC (Set Post-processing Function Module ) ............................................5-86
Statistical Processing ...............................................................................................5-87
TTFRO (Output Statistical Post-processing Function Readings).......................5-87
TTFUNC (Set Statistical Post-processing Function Type) .................................5-88
TTMKPOS (Set Statistical Post-processing Marker Position)............................5-88
TTMKRO (Output Marker reading).....................................................................5-89
TTMKS (Set Statistical Post-processing Marker State) .....................................5-90
TTPSP (Set Statistical Post-processing Display Stop Power) ...........................5-90
TTPST (Set Statistical Post-processing Display Start Power) ...........................5-91
TTSRC (Set Statistical Post-processing Source Selection) ...............................5-91
TTZIN (Statistical Post-processing Function Zoom In) ......................................5-91
TTZOUT (Statistical Post-processing Function Zoom Out)................................5-92
PAE Processing........................................................................................................5-92
PAEBI (Set PAE Bias Current Value) ................................................................5-92
PAEBICF (Set PAE Bias Current Conversion Factor) .......................................5-92
PAEBIS (Set PAE Bias Current Source)............................................................5-93
PAEBV (Set PAE Bias Voltage Value)...............................................................5-93

13000-00163 ix
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA

PAECFG(Set PAE Input Configuration) ............................................................ 5-94


PAEO (Output PAE Reading)............................................................................ 5-94
PAESRC (Set PAE Source Selection) .............................................................. 5-95
Chapter 6. Sensor Commands ..................................................................................... 6-1

Set Up ........................................................................................................................ 6-3


SNFILTS (Set Sensor Filter State) ...................................................................... 6-3
SNTYPE (Query Sensor Information) ................................................................. 6-3
SNUNIVM (Set Universal Sensor Operation Mode) ............................................ 6-4
Cal Factor .................................................................................................................. 6-5
SNCFADJ (Set Sensor Calibration Factor Adjust) .............................................. 6-5
SNCFCAL (Set Calibration Factor Manual)......................................................... 6-6
SNCFRQ (Set Calibration Factor Frequency Value)........................................... 6-6
SNCFSRC (Set Sensor Cal Factor Source) ........................................................ 6-7
SNCFU (Set Sensor Cal Factor Display Units) ................................................... 6-8
SNCFVAL (Query Current Cal Factor Value) ...................................................... 6-9
SNZSPF (Set V/GHz Calibration Factor Stop Frequency) ................................ 6-10
SNZSPV (Set V/GHz Calibration Factor Stop Voltage)..................................... 6-10
SNZSTF (Set V/GHz Calibration Factor Start Frequency) ................................ 6-11
SNZSTV (Set V/GHz Calibration Factor Start Voltage)..................................... 6-11
Offset ....................................................................................................................... 6-12
SNOFIX (Set Fixed Offset Value)...................................................................... 6-12
SNOFTYP (Set Sensor Offset Type)................................................................. 6-13
SNOFVO (Output Sensor Offset Value) ............................................................ 6-13
SNOTAO (Output Sensor Offset Table in ASCII).............................................. 6-14
SNOTAW (Sensor Offset Table ASCII Write) ................................................... 6-15
SNOTADD (Add Offset Table Entry) ................................................................. 6-16
SNOTBO (Output Offset Table in Binary Format) ............................................. 6-17
SNOTBW (Write Offset Table) .......................................................................... 6-19
SNOTCLR (Clear Offset Table)......................................................................... 6-20
SNOTID (Set Offset Table Identity Name) ........................................................ 6-20
SNOTSEL (Select Offset Table to Apply to Sensor) ......................................... 6-21
SNOTVLD (Query Valid Offset Table)............................................................... 6-22
Edit CF Table ........................................................................................................... 6-23
SNCFUSE (Query Cal factor Table Number In Use) ........................................ 6-23
SNCTABN (Set Cal Factor Table Number) ....................................................... 6-23
SNCTADD (Set Cal Factor Table Entry) ........................................................... 6-24
SNCTAO (Output Sensor Cal Factor Table in ASCII ........................................ 6-25
SNCTAW (Cal Factor Table Direct ASCII Write to Sensor) .............................. 6-26
SNCTBIN (Cal Factor Table Binary Load) ........................................................ 6-27
SNCTBO (Output Cal Factor Table in Binary Format) ...................................... 6-28
SNCTCLR (Clear Cal Factor Table) .................................................................. 6-29

x 13000-00163
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA

SNCTID (Update Cal Factor Table Identity Name) ............................................6-29


SNCTPRE (Preset Cal Factor Table).................................................................6-30
SNCTSAV (Cal Factor Table Save) ...................................................................6-30
SNCTVAL (Query Valid Cal Factor Table).........................................................6-31
Range Hold...............................................................................................................6-32
SNRGH (Set Sensor Range Hold) .....................................................................6-32
Chapter 7. Calibration and Zero Commands ................................................................7-1
BNVZERO (Zero the BNC Input Connector)........................................................7-2
SNCAL (Calibrate Sensor to 0 dBm Reference Source) .....................................7-2
SNCALF (Set Reference Calibrator Frequency) ..................................................7-3
SNRFCAL (Set RF Reference Calibrator State) ..................................................7-3
SNZERO (Zero the Selected Sensor) ..................................................................7-4
Chapter 8. System Commands .....................................................................................8-1

Save/Recall ................................................................................................................8-2
*RCL (Recall Stored Setups) ...............................................................................8-2
*SAV (Save Configuration)...................................................................................8-2
NVLOAD (Load Saved Setup store over the GPIB).............................................8-3
NVNAME (Set Saved Setups Name) ...................................................................8-4
NVOUT (Output the saved setup over the GPIB) ................................................8-5
Config .........................................................................................................................8-6
BNC1M (Set BNC 1 Output Mode Select) ...........................................................8-6
BNC2M (Set BNC 2 Output Mode Select) ...........................................................8-7
BNDSP (Set BNC Analogue Output Display Power Stop Value).........................8-8
BNDST (Set BNC Analogue Output Display Power Start Value).........................8-9
BNOCH (Set BNC Output Channel Configuration) ............................................8-10
BNPLEV (Set BNC Pass Voltage Level)............................................................8-10
BNVOSP (Set BNC Analogue Output Stop Voltage Scale) ...............................8-11
BNVOST (Set BNC Analogue Output Start Voltage Scale) ...............................8-11
SYADDR (Set GPIB Address)............................................................................8-12
SYBAUD (Set RS232 Baud Rate)......................................................................8-12
SYBEEPS (Set Audible Beep on Entry Error State) ..........................................8-13
SYBUFS (Set GPIB Response Buffering State) ................................................8-13
SYDLIT (Set Display Backlight Adjust) ..............................................................8-14
SYDRES (Set Display Measurement Points).....................................................8-15
SYIMAGE (Output Displayed Screen Image) ....................................................8-17
SYLUT (Output Graphics Look-up Table Entries)..............................................8-18
SYSTEP (Set Increment/Decrement Step) ........................................................8-19
SYTACTS (Set Tactile Feedback Sound State) ................................................8-20
SYTEXT (Write User Text ID string) ..................................................................8-20
SYTEXTS (Set User Defined Display Text State)..............................................8-21

13000-00163 xi
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA

Service ..................................................................................................................... 8-22


NVSECS (Set Secure System State) ................................................................ 8-22
Chapter 9. Preset Commands ...................................................................................... 9-1
NVAPN (Preset Instrument to Pre-defined Application Setup Number).............. 9-2
NVFRST (Factory Reset) .................................................................................... 9-3
Chapter 10. Data Acquisition Commands................................................................. 10-1
CWO (Output CW Channel Readings) .............................................................. 10-2
CWON (Output Specified Number of Channel Readings)................................. 10-3
PMNPBLO (Output Pulsed / Modulated Profile Min Binary Long Format) ........ 10-4
PMNPBO (Output Pulsed/Modulated Profile Min Data in Binary Format)......... 10-6
PMNPO (Output Pulsed/Modulated Profile Min Data in ASCII format) ............. 10-8
PMPBLO (Output Pulsed / Modulated Profile in Binary Long Format ............... 10-9
PMPBO (Output Pulsed / Modulated Profile Data in Binary Format) .............. 10-11
PMPO (Output Pulsed / Modulated Profile Data in ASCII Format) ................. 10-12
PMRDO (Output Readout Measurements over Capture Time)....................... 10-13
PMXPBLO (Output Pulsed / Modulated Profile Max Binary Long Format) ..... 10-15
PMXPBO (Output Pulsed/Modulated Profile Max Data in Binary Format) ...... 10-17
PMXPO (Output Pulsed / Modulated Graph Max Data in ASCII Format) ....... 10-18
Chapter 11. Instrument Status Commands .............................................................. 11-1
SYCONT (Continue).......................................................................................... 11-2
SYDISP (Set Display Update) ........................................................................... 11-2
SYERLST (DDE Error List Query)..................................................................... 11-3
SYFAST (Fast Mode) ........................................................................................ 11-5
SYSTART (Initial Startup Self-test Command).................................................. 11-6
SYSTATE (Status Message) ............................................................................. 11-7
SYTEST (Return results of POST or *TST) .................................................... 11-15
Chapter 12. Range Calibrator Commands ............................................................... 12-1
RCABORT (Abort Range Calibrator Test)......................................................... 12-2
RCD (Range Calibrator Data Output)................................................................ 12-2
RCDIAGO (Range Calibrator Diagnostics Test Data Output) ........................... 12-3
RCDIAGT (Set Range Calibrator Diagnostics Test).......................................... 12-4
RCTEST (Start Range Calibrator Test) ............................................................. 12-5
RCZERO (Diagnostics Zero Range Calibrator Sensor Input) ........................... 12-6
Chapter 13. Programming Examples........................................................................ 13-1

CW Measurement Example ..................................................................................... 13-2


EDGE Measurement Example................................................................................. 13-4
GSM Measurement Example................................................................................... 13-6
GPRS Measurement Example................................................................................. 13-8

xii 13000-00163
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA

Multiple Radar Pulse Measurement Example ........................................................13-10


WLAN Measurement Example ...............................................................................13-11
WCDMA Measurement Example............................................................................13-12
Dual Channel Set Up Example...............................................................................13-13
Cal and Zero Operation Examples .........................................................................13-15
Appendix A. ML243xA Reference Table ..................................................................... A-1

Appendix B. Binary Output Decoding Examples......................................................... B-1


Pulsed/Modulated Profile Binary to Float Conversion using Visual Basic .......... B-1
Pulsed/Modulated Profile Binary to Float Conversion using Microsoft Visual C . B-3
Offset Tables Binary to Float Conversion using Microsoft Visual C.................... B-5
Cal Factor Tables Binary to Float Conversion using Microsoft Visual C............. B-7
Appendix C. GPIB PC Card Set-up............................................................................. C-1
GPIB Card Settings............................................................................................. C-1
GPIB Device Template........................................................................................ C-1
Appendix D. Terminology Glossary............................................................................. D-1

13000-00163 xiii
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA

xiv 13000-00163
September 2005
Chapter 1. About this Manual

Purpose and Scope of this Manual


This manual provides detailed information of the GPIB mnemonics for the ML2487A /
ML2488A and ML2495A / ML2496A Peak Power Meters. Explanations in this manual
apply equally to all units mentioned above unless otherwise stated.

Your Comments on this Manual


Every effort has been made to ensure that this manual is thorough, easy to use, and free
from errors. However, to ensure continued improvement, we would welcome your
comments on this, or any other Anritsu document.
Please contact us at the address below if you have any comments, good or bad, find any
errors or omissions, or have any suggestions on how our documentation could be
improved further.
powermeter.support@eu.anritsu.com
Your comments will be logged and reviewed, and whenever possible, will be reflected in a
subsequent release of the document.

Software Versions
This manual provides details of the GPIB commands supported by the following software
versions:
ML2487A: 2.00 ML2495A: 2.00
ML2488A: 2.00 ML2496A: 2.00

Some of the commands documented in this manual may not be available to users of
software versions prior to 1.21. To check the version of the software you are using, power
up the unit and press System > Service > Identity. Details of how to upgrade the
software can be found in chapter 5 of the Operation Manual in the section titled,
Upgrading the System.

Notification of Software Release


The ML248xA / ML249xA software is periodically updated as new features are added to
meet market demands. To receive automatic notification of software releases, send a
blank e-mail with the subject heading of “ML248xA / ML249xA Software Notification
Request” to powermeter.support@eu.anritsu.com. You will receive an e-mail informing
you that the new software is available for download from the site identified.

13000-00163 1-1
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA About this Manual

Using this Manual


A brief summary of each of the chapters in this manual is given below. If you are viewing
the electronic version of this manual you can click on the chapter headings to jump to the
chapter in question.
Chapter 1: About this Manual
Details of the manual itself, how it is structured, and how to use it.
Chapter 2: General Information
An explanation of the GPIB command format and mnemonics, the
registers, and remote operation over RS232.
Chapter 3: IEEE 488.2 Mandatory Commands
Details of all the commands listed as mandatory in the IEEE specification.
Chapter 4: GPIB Remote Trigger Commands
Details of all the remote trigger related commands.
Chapter 5: Channel Commands
Details of the GPIB commands that have functionally equivalent soft key
commands accessible from the Channel hard key on the front panel. The
commands in this chapter are sub-divided into sections based on the soft
key commands within the Channel group. The commands within each of
these sections are listed in alphabetical order and a “Quick Reference
Table” is provided at the front of the chapter.
Chapter 6: Sensor Commands
Details of the GPIB commands that have functionally equivalent soft key
commands accessible from the Sensor hard key on the front panel. The
commands in this chapter are sub-divided into sections based on the soft
key commands within the Sensor group. The commands within each of
these sections are listed in alphabetical order and a “Quick Reference
Table” is provided at the front of the chapter.
Chapter 7: Calibration and Zero Commands
Details of the GPIB commands that have functionally equivalent soft key
commands accessible from the Cal/Zero hard key on the front panel. The
commands in this chapter are sub-divided into sections based on the soft
key commands within the Cal/Zero group. The commands within each of
these sections are listed in alphabetical order and a “Quick Reference
Table” is provided at the front of the chapter.
Chapter 8: System Commands
Details of the GPIB commands that have functionally equivalent soft key
commands accessible from the System hard key on the front panel. The
commands in this chapter are sub-divided into sections based on the soft
key commands within the System group. The commands within each of
these sections are listed in alphabetical order and a “Quick Reference
Table” is provided at the front of the chapter.

1-2 13000-00163
September 2005
About this Manual ML248xA / ML249xA

Chapter 9: Preset Commands


Details of the GPIB commands that have functionally equivalent soft key
commands accessible from the Preset hard key on the front panel. The
commands in this chapter are sub-divided into sections based on the soft
key commands within the Preset group. The commands within each of
these sections are listed in alphabetical order and a “Quick Reference
Table” is provided at the front of the chapter.
Chapter 10: Data Acquisition Commands
Details of the GPIB commands associated with data acquisition that do
not have a directly equivalent hard or soft key combination accessible
from the front panel.
Chapter 11: Instrument Status Commands
Details of the GPIB commands associated with the instruments current
status or error condition. These commands do not have a directly
equivalent hard or soft key combination accessible from the front panel.
Chapter 12: Range Calibrator Commands
Details of the GPIB commands associated with use of the ML2419A range
calibrator. These commands cannot be accessed at the ML248xA /
ML249xA unless the range calibrator is connected.
Chapter 13: Programming Examples
GPIB programming examples for each of the major measurement types.
Appendix A: ML243xA Reference Table
A table listing the ML243xA GPIB commands that can also be used and
the equivalent commands for the ML248xA / ML249xA. The table also
lists any functionality or settings that may exist when using the ML243xA
commands.
Appendix B: Binary Output Decoding Examples
Examples in both Visual Basic and C of how to convert between binary
and floating point data formats.
Appendix C: GPIB PC Card Set-up
The GPIB driver configuration recommended for reliable GPIB
communication with the ML248xA / ML249xA.
Appendix D: Terminology Glossary
A glossary of acronyms and other terms that may be used in this manual
or other GPIB related documentation.

13000-00163 1-3
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA About this Manual

Associated Documentation and Resources


In addition to this manual, the following documents and resources are available on the CD
shipped with the ML248xA / ML249xA power meter.

Documents File type

ML248xA / ML249xA Wideband Peak Power Meter Operation Manual PDF

ML248xA Datasheet PDF


ML249xA Datasheet PDF

ML2400A Datasheet PDF

Power Meter Uncertainty Calculator (for ML24x0A) XLS


High Speed Measurements on Modulated Signals (Application Note for PDF
ML248xA)
Measuring Pulsed Power and Frequency (Application Note for ML248xA) PDF
WLAN Output Power Measurement (Application Note for ML248xA) PDF
Accurate Power Measurements on Modern Communication Systems PDF
(Application Note for ML24x0A)
How to Upgrade the Software PDF
Power Added Efficiency application note PDF

Utilities File type

Screen Capture executable and instructions EXE

Power suite EXE


Data logger EXE

TM
The pdf files listed above can be viewed using Adobe Reader a freeware program that
can be downloaded from http://www.adobe.com/.

1-4 13000-00163
September 2005
About this Manual ML248xA / ML249xA

The Quick Reference Tables


The first page in each of the main chapters of this manual provides a quick reference table
such as that shown below to the GPIB commands detailed within.
The quick reference table allows the user to locate and access the required command
quickly and easily. The “Function” column in each table is listed in alphabetical order
based on a keyword from the description of the command. The command itself is listed in
the center column of the table and if further details are required, the user can turn to the
associated page, or, when viewing this manual electronically, just click on the listed page
number.

13000-00163 1-5
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA About this Manual

Chapter Structure
In each chapter, the full details of each command are listed in alphabetical order, and in
addition, each of the longer chapters are further divided into sub-sections based on the
soft key menu structure. GPIB commands that have functionally equivalent commands on
the ML243xA series power meter are indicated in the manual with the words “ML243xA
command supported”. Refer to the table in appendix A of this manual for a full listing of
these commands and also details on how the settings available may differ.

Setup Section title based on soft key menu.

ML243xA command supported Indicates that ML243xA equivalent command


can also be used. Refer to Appendix A for a full
CWSETLP (Set Settle Percentage Value) listing of these commands.

CWSETLP? (Query Settle Percentage Value)

Set Command: CWSETLP<ws><c><,><settle_pct>

Details: <c> 1 | 2
<settle_pct> : 0.01 - 10 %

Remarks: The settling percentage determines how long the system waits
for the signal to settle. This allows some control over the trade-
off between speed, and the extent to which a measurement
has settled to its final value.

Query Command: CWSETLP?<ws><c>


Return String: CWSETLP <c>,<settle_pct>

Remarks: Returns the settle percentage setting.

1-6 13000-00163
September 2005
Chapter 2. General Information

Overview
The ML248xA / ML249xA Power Meter can be operated remotely through a General-
Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB) connection to a host computer. The ML248xA / ML249xA
conforms to the IEEE 488.1 and IEEE 488.2 Standards and implements the following
IEEE 488 GPIB Interface Functions: SH1, AH1, T6, TE0, L4, LE0, SR1, RL1, PP0, DC1,
and DT1.

Controller GPIB Card Setup


To communicate with the ML248xA / ML249xA over the GPIB bus you will require a GPIB
card, cable, and the associated control software. To communicate effectively with the
power meter, there is a recommended ‘Standard Configuration Setup’ for the PC card.
The setup detailed in Appendix C of this manual is for National Instruments GPIB ISA and
PCI Cards for both Windows and DOS Operating Systems.

Command Format
The ML248xA / ML249xA GPIB interface is designed to accept commands from a
Controller in the format outlined below. When sending commands to the instrument, one
or more parameters must be sent in this manner.
1. An ASCII space must be present between the command mnemonic and the first
parameter.
2. All subsequent parameters after the first, must be separated by a comma (,)
3. Multiple commands may be sent on the same line, but each must be separated by
a semicolon (;)
The GPIB command syntax used throughout this manual is outlined below.

MNEMONIC<ws><param1><,><param2>[<,><param3>]

Item Meaning

MNEMONIC Message Header mnemonic command. Usually written in upper case


characters. Examples of mnemonics are: CWO, CWAVG, CHCFG.
<> The parameters or characters string within the angled brackets ‘< >’ must
be present. Throughout this document the angled brackets ‘< >’ are only
employed as a convention to help users interpret the commands
unambiguously. They MUST NOT be included in the command string
when issuing commands over GPIB.
e.g. If the command syntax is listed as: CWO<ws><channel>
The actual string to send to channel 1 would be: CWO 1

13000-00163 2-1
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA General Information

ws White space character (normally a space character, ASCII number 0x20)

[] The parameter or character string within the square brackets is optional.


Throughout this document the square brackets ‘[ ]’ are employed as a
convention to help users interpret the commands unambiguously. They
MUST NOT be included in the command string when issuing commands
over GPIB.
E.g. CWAVG<ws><c><,> [<mode>]<,>[<avg_num>]
Can be sent in the following ways:
CWAVG 1, ,
CWAVG 1,RPT,
CWAVG 1,RPT,128
, Parameter separator. All GPIB commands having more than one
parameter must use the comma (,) separator between each parameter.
; Message unit separator. A GPIB command message can be made up of a
number of command units separated by the semicolon (;) as seen in the
following example.
CHCFG 1,A; CHCFG 2,B; CHUNIT 1,W; CHUNIT 2, DBW.
| The vertical bar symbol is used within the command parameter list to
indicate that there is more than one choice for the specified parameter.

Controller Termination
All commands sent over the GPIB interface to the power meter must be terminated with
either (or both) of the following:
End Of String (EOS): The '\n' or 0x0A character.
End Of message Indicator (EOI): A hardware line on the GPIB interface bus.

Device Termination
All strings returned in response to GPIB commands are terminated with both the following:
End of String (EOS): ASCII new-line character ( '\n' or 0x0A).
End Of Message Indicator: A hardware line on the GPIB interface bus.

2-2 13000-00163
September 2005
General Information ML248xA / ML249xA

Suffix Conventions
The ML248xA / ML249xA complies with the IEEE Standard Codes and Formats
convention for suffix units and multipliers (e.g. MS for milliseconds.). Suffix units are
always allowed but are not required. All commands issued to the instrument that require a
parameter to be set as a floating-point numeric value can use either the Exponential
notation (E-0x convention) or a suffix multiplier. The table below shows the supported
suffix units and multipliers. Suffix units are optional and can be omitted.

Suffix Multipliers Suffix Units

Definition Mnemonic Definition Mnemonic


1E18 EX Watts W
1E15 PE Decibels DB

1E12 T dB ref to 1 mW DBM


1E9 G dB ref to 1 W DBW
1E6 MA Volts V
1E3 K dB ref to 1 mV DBMV
1E-3 M dB ref to 1 µV DBUV

1E-6 U Hertz HZ

1E-9 N Kilohertz KHZ


1E-12 P Mega Hertz MHZ

1E-15 F Giga Hertz GHZ


1E-18 A Seconds SEC
Seconds S
Percent %

Percent PCT

Data I/O Formats


All data sent by the power meter over the GPIB bus is formatted in conformance to the
IEEE 488.2 specification ‘Response Data’ formatting. The ML248xA / ML249xA uses
primarily ‘Arbitrary ASCII Response Data’ for most commands that return data in ‘ASCII’
format. Commands returning data in ‘Binary’ format use the ‘NRx Numeric Response
Data’.

Configuration Commands
These commands are designed to change the instrument settings in order to configure the
instrument in a given measurement mode, or to modify interface settings.

13000-00163 2-3
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA General Information

Query Commands
Most configuration commands have an equivalent query command. When sending a
query command the instrument will return the current instrument setting. Query
commands are usually issued following a configuration command to ensure the setting
changes have taken effect.

Data Acquisition Commands


The main purpose of these commands is to obtain measurement readings. A number of
data acquisition commands are available to obtain data in differing formats.

2-4 13000-00163
September 2005
General Information ML248xA / ML249xA

GPIB 488.2 Status Registers


The diagrams that follow show the GPIB Status and Event register sets. The meaning of
each bit within a register is described below.

Status Byte Register (STB) and Service Request Enable Register


(SRE)
The Status Byte Register (STB) (Read Only), reports instrument status conditions (see
diagram below). The IEEE 488.2 GPIB standard defines the RQS, ESB and MAV bits as
compulsory bits for device status reporting. The remaining free bits can be used to report
instrument specific status conditions.
The Service Request Enable Register (SRE) (Read/Write), allows the programmer to
enable selected bits to take advantage of the Service Request facility. The Service
Request (SRQ) is a hardware line used by the instrument to request attention from the
controller. For example, if setting the RGH bit in the SRE register, whenever the sensor
goes over or under the operating range the RGH bit in the Status Byte register is set and
the SRQ line is asserted.

Bit Definition

This bit serves a dual function depending on the command used to


read the STB register. When the STB register is read via a Serial
Poll operation this bit is RQS (Request Service). When the STB
RQS/MSS
register is read via the *STB? Command this bit is MSS (Master
Summary Status). This bit has no function in the SRE Register.
(See below for further information on separate bit definitions)

13000-00163 2-5
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA General Information

Request Service
This bit is set when any of the other bits in the Status Byte are set
RQS (except bit 6) AND the corresponding bit in the SRE Register is
enabled. When the RQS bit is set, an SRQ is indicated from the
device to the controller over the GPIB interface. The SRQ is
cleared when the controller executes a serial poll, following this the
status byte is returned to the controller and the bit within the STB
register that caused the SRQ is cleared.
Master Summary Status
MSS This bit is set/reset by performing the inclusive OR of the bit-wise
combination (excluding bit 6) between the Status Byte register and
the Service Request Enable register. Note that the *STB?
Command does not alter the Status byte, nor will it clear an SRQ.
Event status bit
If any of the Standard Event Status Register (ESR) bits are set by
ESB the instrument and the corresponding Standard Event Status
Enable Register (ESE) bit has been enabled by the programmer,
the ESB bit in the Status Register will be set. A SRQ can be
generated by enabling the same bit within the SRE register.
Message available
This bit is always set as long as there is data available to be read
MAV out of the output buffer and cleared when the output buffer is
empty. A SRQ can be generated by enabling the same bit within
the SRE register.
RRS (ML249xA only)
This bit is set when a random repetitive sampling (RRS) method is
RRS being used to acquire the data and the trace has been fully
acquired. When the RRS bit is set, an SRQ is indicated from the
device to the controller when the trace is complete.
LIM Limit Fail Bit
If a channel pass/fail limit settings are exceeded, this bit will be set.
A SRQ can be generated by enabling the same bit within the SRE
register.
RGH Over/under Range bit
If a sensor goes over or under the operating range, this bit is set.
A SRQ can be generated by enabling the same bit within the SRE
register.

Note: The Status Byte register is read via a Serial Poll or with the *STB? Command. It
cannot be written to directly by the user. When the Status Byte is read, all the
bits except the MAV bit are cleared. The Service Request Enable Register is
written to with the *SRE command and read with the *SRE? Command. It is
cleared by *CLS

2-6 13000-00163
September 2005
General Information ML248xA / ML249xA

Standard Event Registers


The standard event registers include the Standard Event Status Register (ESR) and the
Standard Event Status Enable Register (ESE).

Bit Definition
PON Power On bit
This bit is set on power up of the device only and cleared if the instrument
is reset or receives a *CLS command. This bit only indicates that a power
on has occurred.
URQ User Request
Not used for the ML248xA / ML249xA.
CMD Command error
Received an unrecognised command.
EXE Execution error
Could not execute a command. For example, a parameter is out of the
permissible range or graph data is being requested whilst in readout mode.

13000-00163 2-7
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA General Information

DDE Device Dependent Error


The specific error can be found by using the SYERLST command.
QYE Query Error
This bit is set if attempting to read data from the instrument when there is
no data available in the instrument output buffer or attempting to write data
to the instrument when the instrument is busy writing data to the output
buffer or there is an output buffer overflow and data has been lost.
RQC Request Control
Used by GPIB controllers only.
OPC Operation Complete
When a program message that includes the *OPC command has been
completed and the GPIB interface is idle with any responses read out of the
output buffer this bit is set. For example, if the last command in a
configuration sequence is *OPC, the OPC bit in the event status register
will be set when that configuration sequence has been completed.

Note: The Standard Event Status Register is read with the *ESR? Command. Reading
the ESR will clear it. The Standard Events Status Enable Register is written to
with the *ESE command and read with the *ESE? Command. Both registers can
be cleared with the *CLS command.

2-8 13000-00163
September 2005
General Information ML248xA / ML249xA

Using the Event Status Bit (ESB) in the Status Byte


Register
The state of the ESB bit in the Status Byte is dependent on the ESR register state and the
ESE register settings. An SRQ will be generated due to the ESB bit in the Status Byte on
the condition that the following conditions apply:
• An event causes any bit within the ESR register to be set.
• The corresponding bit in the ESE register is enabled (using the *ESE command).
• The ESB bit in the SRE register is enabled (using the *SRE command).
When a) and b) apply, the ESB bit in the Status Byte will be set. An SRQ will be
generated providing c) also applies. The following example illustrates how an SRQ is
generated due to an unrecognised command.
1. Set the CMD bit in the ESE register, and set the ESB bit in the SRE register. Send:
*ESE 32;*SRE 32
2. Send an unrecognised command to the ML248xA / ML249xA. The following
sequence of arbitrary ASCII characters constituting an unrecognised command:
ZKYJQ. An SRQ will be indicated at this point.
3. To clear the SRQ conduct a serial poll using a valid GPIB call, this should return the
decimal value 96, bit 6 for the SRQ and bit 5 for the ESB. The SRQ will be cleared
following a Status Byte read.
4. Send: *ESR? to read the Event Status Register (ESR). This will put 32 (CMD bit set),
or 160 if the PON bit is also set in the output buffer to be read.

13000-00163 2-9
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA General Information

Reprinted with permission from National Instruments Corporation. National Instruments is


a trade name of National Instruments Corporation.

2-10 13000-00163
September 2005
General Information ML248xA / ML249xA

Using the Message Available Bit (MAV) in the Status Byte Register
The MAV bit is set whenever the instrument writes data into the output buffer. Following a
request for data, the controller can monitor the MAV bit by reading the Status Register
(using the *STB? Command). When the MAV bit is set, the controller knows that the
requested data is ready for reading.
Instead of using the *STB? Command, an alternative way to monitor the MAV bit is to
configure the instrument to generate a SRQ when the MAV bit is set as in the example
below:
1. In Readout display mode with the output buffer empty and the MAV bit clear,
configure the ML248xA / ML249xA to generate an SRQ on data becoming available
by setting bit 4 (MAV bit) in the Status Register Enable byte (SRE): *SRE 16
2. Send the command below to request a reading from measurement channel 1: CWO
1.
3. A SRQ will be generated when the reading is placed in the output buffer. Conduct a
Serial Poll using a valid GPIB call, which should return the decimal value 80,
corresponding to bit 6 for the SRQ and bit 4 for the MAV bit.
4. Acquire the reading using a valid GPIB call. If there is no more data pending in the
output buffer the MAV bit will be cleared.
These methods should be used to avoid holding up the GPIB bus by issuing a request for
data followed by a read operation which the power meter may not be able to satisfy
immediately.

Note: The MAV bit should only be used as an indication of a new message pending in the
output buffer. Once started reading data, the status of the MAV bit cannot be guaranteed
stable until the entire message is acquired including the message terminator.
If attempting to read large amounts of data, for example using the PMPO command in
repeated smaller size chunks by carrying out multiple read operations (e.g. using a
program loop), the state of the MAV bit should not be relied upon as an indication that the
complete data block has been transferred. This is because the MAV bit may be cleared at
any time during the transfer if the Controller requests data faster than the power meter can
supply. Under these circumstances part of the data may be left unread in the power meter
output buffer. The recommended practice when reading large amounts of data is to
employ a data buffer whose size is sufficiently large to acquire the whole data in a single
data transfer.

GPIB Buffering
The ML248xA / ML249xA default setting is GPIB Buffering Enabled. In this mode, multiple
requests for data are queued sequentially in the output buffer. Message items shall be
read from the output queue starting from the earliest data request first.
If GPIB Buffering is disabled using the SYBUFS OFF command, messages will not be
queued. Any new data request will over-write the previous data. In this mode, if multiple
requests for data are made without retrieving the response following each request, all
previous messages will be lost. (Note that this does not include the serial poll request,
which is handled independently.)

13000-00163 2-11
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA General Information

GPIB on RS232
Serial Remote Operation
The ML248xA / ML249xA RS232 connector on the rear panel supports all GPIB
commands including IEEE 488.2 low-level control and handshaking.
Hardware handshake CTS and RTS lines are used to control the flow of data in and out of
the power meter and must be available in the cable as hardware handshaking is always
enabled. The DTR and DSR lines are connected together within the power meter.
The ML248xA / ML249xA communications serial connector pins are as detailed in the
table below.

PIN SIGNAL
1 NOT USED
2 RX Data
3 TX Data
4 DTR handshake signal
5 Signal ground
6 DSR handshake signal
7 RTS handshake signal
8 CTS handshake signal
9 NOT USED

The serial interface baud rate can be set using the System > Config > Remote > Set
RS232 Baud Rate menu selection or the equivalent GPIB command. Available baud rates
are: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 (default), 19200, 38400 and 57600. Other parameters are
predefined as: 8 bits, no parity and 1 stop bit and cannot be changed.
Commands are entered as with the GPIB interface, conforming to the command format.
All GPIB commands are supported. There are some additional RS232-specific commands
that are prefixed with an exclamation mark (!). All GPIB type commands and command
strings should be terminated with a new line character (0A in hexadecimal format).

The special serial mode commands do not require a termination character. Requested
data is returned in the same format as with GPIB, but with a preceding ‘R’ and a
terminating new line character. In serial mode, the meter cannot be addressed to talk, but
measurement data can still be obtained by using the GPIB trigger commands TR1 and
TR2. All GPIB type commands and command strings should be terminated with a new line
character (0A hex). The special serial mode commands do NOT require a termination
character. SRQs are available, and are output as SRQ message ‘S’ followed by a
terminating new line character. When the SRQ message has been received, an “!SPL”
command (equivalent to the GPIB serial poll) can be issued. The power meter will respond
with the serial poll data message, which is a single character, preceded by ‘P’ and
terminated by a new-line character.
A device clear message !DCL can be sent to clear the power meter input and output
message queues, and terminate any GPIB or serial actions pending.

Note: It is recommended that there is only one serial command in each command string.
Terminate each command with a new-line character.

2-12 13000-00163
September 2005
General Information ML248xA / ML249xA

Summary of RS232 commands


The following table lists the GPIB/RS232 Modem Commands and the special serial
interface only commands.

Mnemonic Parameter Meaning Comments

RS232 type command


only. Clears all buffered
GPIB/RS232 messages
waiting to be processed.
!DCL none Device clear
Clears all buffered
GPIB/RS232 data waiting
to be output. Stops any
pending actions.

RS232 type command


only. Allows a GPIB type
serial poll to be requested
in response to an SRQ
from the power meter. This
will return the instrument
!SPL none Serial poll
status register and clear
the SRQ bit within that
register. The *CLS
command should be used
to clear the rest of the
register.
Response to serial
P None Status Byte
poll
Return of requested
R None
data

Note: The RS232-type commands (!SPL and !DCL) do NOT require terminating. All
other commands or strings of commands require a new line character to terminate.

13000-00163 2-13
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA General Information

Command Mnemonics
The GPIB command set is organised into functionally related groups, based on the soft-
key hierarchy accessible from the front panel hard keys.
To ease identification of commands, each GPIB mnemonic is initiated by a unique two-
letter ID string, which provides an indication of the functional group the mnemonic belongs
to. The table below defines the two letter ID strings and their related functional groups.

Device-Specific Commands – ML248xA / ML249xA Command Set

ID Code Description

BN BNC Rear Panel Connector

CH Channel

TR Triggering
PM Pulsed / Modulated Measurement Mode
GP Gating Patterns
MK Markers

LM Limits

CW CW measurement mode
PP Post-Processing
PA Power Added Efficiency
TT Statistical Data Processing

SN Sensor
NV Non-volatile Stores
SY System settings

RC Range Calibrator

2-14 13000-00163
September 2005
Chapter 3. IEEE 488.2 Mandatory Commands
Function Command Page reference

GPIB Status Bytes - Clear *CLS 3-2


Identification - Query *IDN? 3-4

Operation Complete Indication - Set or Query *OPC? 3-5


Reset Instrument *RST 3-5
Self-test - Query *TST? 3-8

Service Request Enable Register - Set or Query *SRE? 3-6


Standard Event Status Enable Register - Set or *ESE? 3-2
Query
Standard Event Status Register - Query *ESR? 3-4
Status Byte Register - Query *STB? 3-7
Trigger Command *TRG 3-7
Wait to Continue *WAI 3-8

13000-00163 3-1
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA IEEE 488.2 Mandatory Commands

*CLS (Clear GPIB Status Bytes)


Set Command: *CLS
Remarks: Clears all the GPIB status data structures, including the Event
Status Register and Status Register, except for the MAV bit.
*CLS does not clear the Output Queue.

*ESE (Set Standard Event Status Enable Register)

*ESE? (Query Standard Event Status Enable Register)


Set Command: *ESE<ws><mask>
Details: <mask> 8-bit binary mask in decimal format
Note: <mask> is the sum of the binary weights of each of the bits to
be enabled. Refer to chapter 2 for a description of the
Standard Event Status and Standard Event Status Enable
registers.
Remarks: Each bit in this register reports IEEE 488.2 specific events.
The following are the conditions that will cause a bit within the
Standard Event Status Register to be set to TRUE.
Bit 7 The Power On (PON) bit is set when there has been a
transition from a power OFF state to a power ON
state.
Bit 5 Command Error (CMD). This bit is set when a GPIB
command with incorrect syntax is issued to the power
meter.
Bit 4 Execution Error (EXE). This bit is set when incorrect
data is sent to the power meter (e.g. SYADDR 57
would result in an Execution Error as the allowable
address value range is 1 to 30).
Bit 3 Device Dependent Error (DDE). This bit is set true
whenever a measurement related error occurs.
Device Dependent Errors can be as follows:
a) ZERO fail: Zero attempted for a sensor and
failed.
b) CAL 0 dBm fail: 0 dBm value too far out of
range to be corrected.
c) Display channel number goes out of displayable
range (Displayable range is +299.999 to –
299.999 dBm).
d) Illegal log calculation for a channel - When a

3-2 13000-00163
September 2005
IEEE 488.2 Mandatory Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

channel input configuration combines the


readings from two sensors, the operation of the
data is carried out in linear units. If the result of
the combination produces a negative linear
value and the units must be converted to dB for
display, an illegal logarithmic operation occurs
and the DDE flag will be set.
e) Request for data from a channel with no sensor
connected.
Bit 2 Query Error (QYE). This bit is set in the following
cases:
1. When attempting to read data without having
first sent a complete query command
2. When sending a GPIB command before the
instrument has finished data output to the GPIB
3. When a Deadlock situation occurs, where both
instrument’s input and output queues are full,
the instrument is waiting to send further data to
the output queue and the controller is waiting to
send further commands to the instrument.
Bit 0 Operation Complete: Set when the *OPC command
completes and can be used to tell the controller that
the unit has completed those commands just sent.
See *OPC and *OPC? for more detail. All other bits
are not used. The bits just described above are 488.2
common bits
Notes: The bits in the Standard Event Status Enable Register are the
same as those in the Standard Event Status Register. The two
registers are bit-wise AND’ed to determine which standard
event(s) will generate a SRQ.

Query Command: *ESE?


Return String: <mask>
Details: <mask> is a decimal representation of the 8-bit mask as
defined above.
Remarks: ESE? Does not clear the Standard Event Status Enable
register. Use *ESE 0 or *CLS for this purpose.

13000-00163 3-3
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA IEEE 488.2 Mandatory Commands

*ESR? (Standard Event Status Register Query)


Query Command: *ESR?
Return String: <mask>
Details: <mask> is a decimal representation of the binary value of the
Standard Event Status Register.
Remarks: Returns the current state of the Standard Event Register
(ESR)
Example: A return value of 5 (0000 0101 in binary) indicates that bits 0
(Operation Complete) and bit 2 (Query Error) are set.

*IDN? (Identification Query)


Query Command: *IDN? (alternatively SYOI can be used)
Return String: <company name>,<model>,<serial>,<firmware version>
Details: <company name> ASCII string (7 characters)
<model> ML248xA / ML249xA
<serial> Instrument unique serial number
<firmware version> Current firmware version loaded into
the instrument
Remarks: This command identifies the instrument returning the message
string with details described above.

3-4 13000-00163
September 2005
IEEE 488.2 Mandatory Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

*OPC (Set Operation Complete Indication)

*OPC? (Query Operation Complete Indication)


Set Command: *OPC
Remarks: Sets the OPC Event bit in the Standard Event Status Register
when all pending operations are completed.
Example: SNRGH A, 1; SNRGH B, 3; *OPC

Query Command: *OPC?


Remarks: An ASCII ‘1’ will be placed in the output buffer when the range
hold commands have been completed.
Example: SNRGH A, 1; SNRGH B, 2; *OPC?
Note: These commands generate indications when all pending
operations are completed. An operation is complete when all
input messages processed and all responses have been read
out of the GPIB output buffer.

*RST (Instrument Reset)


Set Command: *RST
Remarks: Resets the ML248xA / ML249xA to its default configuration.
This command has the same effect as pressing the [Preset] >
Reset key sequence on the front panel.
Note: The following settings will NOT be affected:
- Offset Tables
- GPIB settings
- GPIB Status Registers
- GPIB Input/Output queues

13000-00163 3-5
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA IEEE 488.2 Mandatory Commands

*SRE (Service Request Enable Register)

*SRE? (Query Service Request Enable Register)


Set Command: *SRE<ws><mask>
Details: <mask> Decimal representation of the 8 bit binary mask
Remarks: <mask> is the sum of the binary weights of each of the bits to
be enabled. Refer to the chapter 2 in this manual for a
description of the bits in the Status Byte and Service Request
Enable registers. Note that bit 6 should never be set.
Example: 1. To enable bit 4 (Message Available): *SRE 16
2. To enable bit 1 (Limit Fail): *SRE 2
3. To enable both bits: *SRE 18
Note: The bits in the Service Request Enable Register (SRE) are the
same as those in the Status Byte Register (STB), except for bit
6, which is not used in the SRE. With the exception of bit 6 the
two registers are bit-wise AND’ed to determine which
condition(s) will generate a SRQ.

Query Command: *SRE?


Return String: <mask>
Details: <mask> Decimal representation of the 8-bit mask as defined
above.
Remarks: *SRE? Does not clear the Instrument Status Enable register.
Use *SRE 0 or *CLS for this purpose. Bit 6 will never be set.

3-6 13000-00163
September 2005
IEEE 488.2 Mandatory Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

*STB? (Status Byte Register Query)


Query Command: *STB?
Return String: <mask>
Details: Decimal representation of the binary value of the Instrument
Status Register.
Remarks: Returns the current state of the Status Byte Register (STB)
with the RQS bit replaced by the MSS bit (bit 6). MSS is the
GPIB Master Summary Status; when set it indicates that the
device has at least one reason for requesting service.
Note: Although the MSS message is sent in bit position 6 of the
device’s response to the *STB? query, it is not sent in
response to a serial poll and should not be considered part of
the IEEE 488.1/ IEEE 488.2 Status Register. MSS = the Status
Byte (STB) OR`ed with the Service Request Enable register
(SRE).
Unlike the *ESR? command *STB? does not clear the
Instrument Status Register following the query.
Example: A return value of 67 (binary 0100 0011) indicates that bits 0
(Over/Under Range Bit), 1 (Limit Fail Bit), and bit 6 (Master
Summary Status) are set.

*TRG (Trigger Command)


Set Command: *TRG
Remarks: This command has the equivalent effect as the GPIB Group
Execute Trigger (GET) command. The action performed on
receiving a *TRG depends upon the currently enabled GTn
settings and will result in either a TR1-type or TR2-type
measurement acquisition.
Following a triggered data acquisition, the instrument will
return a single measurement if in Single Channel Display or
two measurement readings if in Dual Channel Display. Note
that the type of measurement returned depends on the
Channel Configuration (refer to the TR1, TR2 command
explanations for a full definition).

13000-00163 3-7
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA IEEE 488.2 Mandatory Commands

*TST? (Self-test Query Command)


Query Command: *TST?
Return String: Depending on the outcome of the self-test the return string will
be:
SUCCESS If self-test was successful
FAILURE If any test within the self-test cycle failed
Remarks: Invokes an instrument Self-test cycle and places the return
string in the output buffer. Use the command SYTEST for
more detail on the results of Self-test.
Note: This command will re-start the measurement sweep in Power
Added and Statistical post-processing modes. Ensure that any
relevant data is acquired using the appropriate command
before sending *TST?

*WAI (Wait to Continue)


Set Command: *WAI
Remarks: This command prevents the instrument from executing any
new commands or queries until the command being currently
executed has been terminated.
Note: This command is supported as a mandatory 488.2 command.
However, since the ML248xA / ML249xA series does not
support overlapped commands, issuing this command will
effectively result in no action being taken.

3-8 13000-00163
September 2005
Chapter 4. GPIB Remote Trigger Commands
Function Command Page reference

GET Command - Ignore GT0 4-2


GET Command to TR1 Type - Enable GT1 4-2
GET Command to TR2 Type - Enable GT2 4-2

Trigger Free Run TR3 4-8

Trigger Hold Mode TR0 4-2


Trigger Immediate TR1 4-3

Trigger with Settling Delay TR2 4-6

13000-00163 4-1
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA GPIB Remote Trigger Commands

GT0 (Enable Ignore the Group Execute Trigger (GET) Command)


Set Command: GT0
Remarks: When this command is issued the ML248xA / ML249xA will
ignore the Group Execute Trigger (GET) or the *TRG
commands.

GT1 (Enable 'GET' Command to TR1 Type (Immediate) Trigger)


Set Command: GT1
Remarks: When the power meter receives a GET or *TRG command, the
system will perform a TR1-type trigger command.

GT2 (Enable 'GET' Command to TR2 Type (Settling Delay) Trigger)


Set Command: GT2
Remarks: When the power meter receives a GET or *TRG command, the
system will perform a TR2-type trigger command.

TR0 (Trigger Hold Mode)


Set Command: TR0
Remarks: This command places the instrument into trigger hold mode. In
this mode the instrument will not respond to any trigger event
until it receives a TR1, TR2,GET (group executive trigger), or a
*TRG command. On sending the TR0 command the
instrument will clear the internal averaging buffers and restart
the averaging count, according to the averaging number
setting, ready for the following command.
Note: Use the TR3 command to revert back to the instrument trigger
mode prior to sending the TR0 command.

4-2 13000-00163
September 2005
GPIB Remote Trigger Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

TR1 (Trigger Immediate)


Set Command: TR1<ws><c>
Details: <c> 1 | 2 | 1&2
Return String: The measurement reading(s) returned depend on the selected
channel(s) for the TR1 command and on the current
measurement mode configuration for the selected channel(s)
as outlined below:
IMPORTANT NOTE: On successful execution of this
command, by default, the instrument will place one or two
measurement readings in the GPIB output buffer. These
readings must be fetched from the instrument first, before
attempting to request additional measurement data.
Channel 1 | 2
CW Mode : <ch_meas>
Pulsed/Modulated Mode:
Active Gating Pattern (default) <gp_meas_average>
Capture Time (if no gates enabled) <ct_meas_average>
Post Processing Mode:
Statistical Analysis TR1 not supported in this mode
Power Added Efficiency TR1 not supported in this mode
Channel 1&2:
IMPORTANT NOTE: If <c> is 1&2, the instrument must be in
Linked Trigger mode (see TRLINKS command), and both
channels must be configured in the same measurement mode.
An execution error will be raised if failing to meet these
conditions.
CW Mode: <ch1_meas>,<ch2_meas>
Pulsed/Modulated Mode:
Active Gating Pattern <ch1_gp_avg>,<ch2_gp_avg>
Whole Capture Time <ch1_ct_avg>,<ch2_ct_avg>
Post Processing Mode:
Statistical Analysis TR1 not supported in this mode
Power Added Efficiency TR1 not supported in this mode
Measurement Mode Combinations:
Combinations of the above measurements will be returned
when channels are configured in different measurement
modes. For example for channel 1 configured in ‘CW mode’
and channel 2 in ‘Pulsed/Modulated Mode - Active Gating
Pattern’:

13000-00163 4-3
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA GPIB Remote Trigger Commands

Return String: <ch1_meas>,< ch2_gp_avg >

Remarks: On successful execution of this command, by default, the


instrument will place one or two measurement readings in the
GPIB output buffer as outlined below. These readings must be
fetched from the instrument first, before attempting to request
additional measurement data.
This command will set up the trigger conditions for a data
acquisition cycle on the selected channel. The trigger
conditions are defined by the Hardware Trigger Settings (e.g.
whether internal or external triggering or rising of falling edge
etc.).
The relationship between the TR1 command and the
Hardware Trigger can be defined as follows: When sent, the
TR1 command will act as a ‘Trigger Qualifier’ for the next
Hardware Trigger event for the selected channel, effectively
placing the instrument into a ‘Wait for Trigger State’. When the
Trigger event occurs, the instrument will carry out a data
acquisition cycle and then place itself into a ‘Trigger Hold
State’ until the next TR-type command is sent. The TR1
command effectively causes a single shot Hardware Trigger
event.
While in ‘Trigger Hold State’, the user is guaranteed valid
measurements for the same trigger event. At this point the
user can retrieve measurement data, in addition to the default
measurements, by sending the appropriate GPIB Data
Acquisition commands (e.g. CWO, PMPO,GPMO etc.
depending on the instrument’s measurement mode
configuration).
The instrument will process the acquired data according to the
Measurement Mode, the Averaging Mode and the Averaging
Number settings as follows:
Pulsed / Modulated Measurement Mode:
Following the hardware trigger, the acquired sample will be
added to the internal averaging buffer. The reading returned to
the user will be the average of all the past samples contained
in the averaging buffer including the latest sample just
acquired, according to the current averaging settings.
CW Measurement Mode:
The CW averaging settings will affect the behaviour of the TR1
command as follows:
a) Moving Average and Automatic Averaging – Following
the hardware trigger, the acquired sample will be added
to the internal averaging buffer. The reading returned to
the user will be the average of all the past samples
contained in the averaging buffer including the latest
sample just acquired, according to the current averaging
settings.

4-4 13000-00163
September 2005
GPIB Remote Trigger Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

b) Repeat Average – The returned reading will be the


average of ‘n’ samples where ‘n’ is the user-selected
Averaging Number.
c) Averaging Off,– When averaging is turned OFF, the
instrument will return the next sample as a measurement
reading.
Notes: Use the TR0 command before sending any other TR-type
command if wishing to clear the Internal Averaging Buffers and
place the instrument into Trigger Hold Mode. This will
effectively prevent the instrument from acquiring any further
samples until a TR1 command is issued.
The instrument will only return the default average readings,
without mnemonic header or channel parameter.
In Pulsed/Modulated mode the gating pattern average reading
is returned as default. If no gating patterns are enabled, then
the average over capture time is returned.
Additional measurements can be obtained over and above the
default measurements by issuing the appropriate GPIB data
acquisition commands (e.g. CWO, PMPO, GPMO etc.).

13000-00163 4-5
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA GPIB Remote Trigger Commands

TR2 (Trigger with Settling Delay)


Set Command: TR2<ws><c>
Details: <c> 1 | 2 | 1&2
Remarks: * Channel 1&2 only allowed in linked trigger mode.
IMPORTANT NOTE: On successful execution of this
command, by default, the instrument will place one or two
measurement readings in the GPIB output buffer as outlined
below. These readings must be fetched from the instrument
first, before attempting to request additional measurement
data.
Return String: The measurement reading(s) returned depend on the selected
channel(s) for the TR2 command and on the current
measurement mode configuration for the selected channel(s)
as follows:
If <c> is 1 | 2:
CW Mode <ch_meas>
Pulsed/Modulated:
Active Gating Pattern (default) <gp_meas_average>
Capture Time (if no gates enabled) <ct_meas_average>
Post Processing:
Statistical Analysis TR2 not supported in this mode
Power Added Efficiency TR2 not supported in this mode
If <c> is 1&2:
IMPORTANT NOTE: If <c> is 1&2, the instrument must be in
Linked Trigger mode (see TRLINKS command), and both
channels must be configured in the same measurement mode.
An execution error will be raised if failing to meet these
conditions.
CW Mode: <ch1_meas>,<ch2_meas>
Pulsed/Modulated:
Active Gating Pattern <ch1_gp_avg>,<ch2_gp_avg>
Whole Capture Time <ch1_ct_avg>,<ch2_ct_avg>
Post Processing:
Statistical Analysis TR2 not supported in this mode
Power Added Efficiency TR2 not supported in this mode

The instrument will only return the default average readings,


without mnemonic header or channel parameter.

4-6 13000-00163
September 2005
GPIB Remote Trigger Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

In Pulsed/Modulated mode the gating pattern average reading


is returned as default. If no gating patterns are enabled, then
the average over capture time is returned.
Additional measurements can be obtained whilst still in trigger
hold state by issuing the appropriate GPIB data acquisition
commands (e.g. CWO, PMPO, GPMO etc.).
Use the TR0 command before sending any other TR-type
command if wishing to clear the Internal Averaging Buffers and
place the instrument into Trigger Hold Mode. This will
effectively prevent the instrument from acquiring any further
samples until a TR2 command is issued.
Remarks: This command sets up the trigger conditions for a data
acquisition cycle on the selected channel. The trigger
conditions are defined by the Hardware Trigger Settings (e.g.
whether internal or external triggering etc.).
The relationship between the TR2 command and the
Hardware Trigger can be defined as follows: When sent, the
TR2 command will act as a ‘Trigger Qualifier’ for the next
Hardware Trigger event for the selected channel, effectively
placing the instrument into a ‘Wait for Trigger State’.
When a trigger event occurs, the instrument will then perform
as many data acquisition cycles as required, depending on the
Averaging parameter settings, before placing itself into a
‘Trigger Hold State’ until the next TR-type command is sent.
For a TR2 command this means the following:
When Averaging is ON:
Acquiring multiple samples (under the defined trigger
conditions) into the internal averaging buffers up to the user-
selected Averaging Number. Only then an averaged
measurement reading will be returned to the user.
When Averaging in OFF:
Returning the next sample as a measurement reading.
Note that each time the TR2 command is issued, the Internal
Averaging buffers will be cleared and a new acquisition cycle
re-started.
While in Trigger Hold State, the user is guaranteed valid
measurements for the same trigger event. Additional
measurement data (over and above the returned default
measurements ) shall be retrieved by sending the appropriate
GPIB Data Acquisition commands (e.g. CWO, PMPO,GPMO
etc. depending on the instrument’s measurement mode
configuration).
Note that data will not be guaranteed valid on a non-selected
channel (i.e. sending the command ‘TR2 2’ guarantees valid
data for channel 2 only.
The instrument will process the acquired data according to the

13000-00163 4-7
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA GPIB Remote Trigger Commands

Measurement Mode, the Averaging Mode and the Averaging


Number settings as follows:

Pulsed /Modulated Measurement Mode:


Averaging ON:
The returned reading will be the average of ‘n’ samples where
‘n’ is the user-selected Sweep Averaging Number.
Averaging OFF:
Returns the next sample as a measurement reading.
CW Measurement Mode:
The averaging settings for CW will affect the behaviour of the
TR2 command as follows:

a) Repeat Average – The returned measurement reading


will be the average of ‘n’ samples where ‘n’ is the user-
selected Averaging Number.

b) Moving Average and Automatic Averaging – For a


TR2 command, these averaging settings will be treated in
the same way as Repeat Averaging.
c) Averaging Off,– When averaging is turned OFF, the
instrument will return the next sample as a measurement
reading.

TR3 (Trigger Free Run)


Set Command: TR3
Remarks: Sets the power meter back into free run mode on both
channels.

4-8 13000-00163
September 2005
Chapter 5. Channel Commands
Function Command Page reference

Active Channel - Set or Query CHACTIV 5-6


Active Gating Pattern Measurement - Output GPAMO 5-29

Active Gating Pattern Number – Set or Query GPACTN 5-28


Active Marker - Move to Maximum MKTMAX 5-61
Active Marker - Move to Minimum MKTMIN 5-61

Active Marker - Set or query MKACTN 5-45


Active Marker Position – Set or Query MKAPOS 5-47
Capture Time – Set or Query TRCAPT 5-17

CW Averaging Mode – Set or Query CWAVG 5-41


Decimal Point Resolution - Set or Query CHRES 5-9
Delta Marker – Set or Query MKDELTS 5-48
Delta Marker Measurement Type – Set or Query MKDMEAS 5-49

Delta Marker Position – Set or Query MKDPOS 5-51

Delta Marker Readings - Output MKDO 5-50


Delta Markers Link State – Set or Query MKDLINK 5-49
Displayed Channels – Set or Query CHDISPN 5-8

Duty Cycle State – Set or Query CWDUTYS 5-44

Duty Cycle Value – Set or Query CWDUTY 5-44


External Trigger Edge – Set or Query TRXEDG 5-26
Fail Beep Control – Set or Query LMFBEEP 5-62

Fail Indicator Hold – Set or Query LMFHOLD 5-63


Fence Number State – Set or Query GPFENS 5-31
Fence Start Time - Set or Query GPFENST 5-32
Fence Stop Time Set or Query GPFENSP 5-32

Gate Number State - Set or Query GPGATS 5-33


Gate Pattern 1 Repeat Number - Set or Query GP1REPN 5-27
Gate Pattern 1 Repeat Offset - Set or Query GP1REPT 5-28
Gate Pattern 1 Repeat State – Set or Query GP1REPS 5-27

Gate Start Time - Set or Query GPTIMST 5-39

13000-00163 5-1
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

Function Command Page reference

Gate Stop Time - Set or Query GPTIMSP 5-39

Gating Pattern Number Measurement - Output GPNMO 5-36


Gating Patterns - Set Hide GPHIDES 5-33

Gating Patterns - Switch OFF GPOFF 5-38


Gating Patterns Measurements - Output All Enabled GPMO 5-34
Gating Patterns Min/Max Tracking - Reset GPARST 5-31
Hide Gating Patterns State - Query GPHIDES 5-33
Input Configuration – Set or Query CHCFG 5-7
Internal Trigger Edge - Set or Query TRINEDG 5-22
Internal Trigger Level - Set or Query TRINLEV 5-22

Limit - Complex Limit Specification Set or Query LMXSPEC 5-72


Limit – Define Full Complex Limit Specification LMXSPEF 5-73
Limit Checking State – Set or Query LMSTATE 5-64
Limit Checking Type - Set or Query LMTYP 5-65
Limit Failure Indicator - Clear LMFCLR 5-62

Limit Line Test Type - Set or Query LMLINE 5-63

Limits - Define Complex Segment LMXSEG 5-70


Limits - Lower Limit Line Value – Set or Query LMSLO 5-64

Limits - Output Complex Limits Specification LMXSPO 5-75


Limits - Query All Complex Stores State LMXASTQ 5-66
Limits - Query Complex Limits Power Offset LMXPOF? 5-67
Limits - Query Complex Limits Store Name LMXNAME? 5-66

Limits - Query Complex Memory Store LMXSTQ 5-73

Limits - Query Complex Time Offset LMXTOF? 5-77


Limits - Query Repeat State LMXREPS? 5-68
Limits - Repeat Count - Set or Query LMXREPN? 5-67
Limits - Set Complex Limits Store Name LMXNAME 5-66
Limits - Set Complex Specification ID Header LMXSID 5-71
Limits - Set Repeat State LMXREPS 5-68
Marker - Number Reading - Output MKNO 5-53

Marker - Set Active Position MKAPOS 5-47

5-2 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

Function Command Page reference

Marker Position - Set or Query MKPOS 5-55

Marker reading - Output TTMKRO 5-89


Markers - Switch All Off MKAOFF 5-47

Markers Readings - Output All Enabled MKENO 5-52


Markers State - Set or Query MKSTATE 5-61
Measurement Hold – Set or Query CHOLD 5-83
Measurement Mode – Set or Query CHMODE 5-8
Output Statistical Function Readings TTFRO 5-87
PAE Bias Current Value – Set or Query PAEBI 5-92
PAE Bias Current Conversion Factor – Set or Query PAEBICF 5-92

PAE Bias Current Source – Set or Query PAEBIS 5-93


PAE Bias Voltage Value – Set or Query PAEBV 5-93
PAE Input Configuration – Set or Query PAECFG 5-94
PAE - Output Reading PAEO 5-94
PAE Source Selection – Set or Query PAESRC 5-95

Peaking Indicator - Reset Channel Readout CHPIRST 5-84

Post Processing Acquisition - Restart PPACQRT 5-85


Post Processing Acquisition State – Set or Query PPACQS 5-85

Post-processing Function Module - Set or Query PPFUNC 5-86


Power Replication Offset - Set or Query LMXROFP 5-68
Profile Sweep Averaging Number - Set or Query PMAVGN 5-42
Pulse Fall Time - Output MKPFTO 5-54

Pulse Off Time - Output MKPOTO 5-56

Pulse Repetition Interval - Output MKPRIO 5-57


Pulse Rise Time - Output MKPRTO 5-58
Pulse Width - Output MKPWTO 5-60
Pulsed/Modulated Measurement Display Type – Set PMDTYP 5-12
or Query
Pulsed/Modulated Profile - Autoscale PMPAUTO 5-78

Pulsed/Modulated Profile - Reset PMPDRST 5-43

Pulsed/Modulated Profile Data Representation Type PMPDREP 5-81


- Set or Query

13000-00163 5-3
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

Function Command Page reference

Pulsed/Modulated Profile Min/Max Tracking Mode - PMPTRK 5-82


Set or Query

Pulsed/Modulated Profile Reference Level - Set or PMPREF 5-78


Query
Pulsed/Modulated Profile Scale - Set or Query PMPSCAL 5-79
Pulsed/Modulated Measurement Type - Set or PMMEAS 5-13
Query
Pulsed/Modulated Profile Averaging - Reset PMAVRST 5-43
Pulsed/Modulated Profile Averaging State - Set or PMAVGS 5-43
Query
Readout Peak Indicator State – Set or Query CHPKS 5-84
Relative Mode Control - Set or Query CWREL 5-40
RRS Trace State – Query PMRRS? 5-14
Set Complex Limits Time Offset LMXTOF 5-77
Set Statistical Post-processing Source Selection - TTSRC 5-91
Query
Settle Percentage Value - Set or Query CWSETLP 5-11
Specification - Save to Complex Limits Store LMXSAVE 5-69

Statistical Function Type - Set or Query TTFUNC 5-88


Statistical Post-processing Display Start Power - Set TTPST 5-91
or Query
Statistical Post-processing Display Stop Power - Set TTPSP 5-90
or Query
Statistical Post-processing Function - Zoom In TTZIN 5-91
Statistical Post-processing Function - Zoom Out TTZOUT 5-92

Statistical Post-processing Marker Position – Set or TTMKPOS 5-88


Query
Statistical Post-processing Marker State - Set TTMKS 5-89

Statistical Post-processing Source Selection - Query TTSRC 5-91

Time Replication Offset - Set or Query LMXROFT 5-69


Tracking - Min and Max Values - Set or Query CWMMTKS 5-80
Tracking - Reset Min and Max CWMMRST 5-80
Trigger – Bandwidth - Set or Query TRBW 5-16

5-4 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

Function Command Page reference

Trigger – Waveform Position - Set TRWFPOS 5-25

Trigger – Waveform State - Set TRWFS 5-26


Trigger - External Edge - Set or Query TRXEDG 5-26

Trigger - Internal Trigger Level - Set or Query TRINLEV 5-22


Trigger Arming Mode - Set or Query TRARMD 5-14
Trigger Delay Time - Set or Query TRDLYT 5-18
Trigger Frame Arming Level - Set TRFLEV 5-19
Trigger Frame Arming Time Duration - Set TRFTIM 5-20
Trigger Hold-off State - Set or Query TRHOFS 5-21
Trigger Hold-off Time - Set or Query TRHOFT 5-21

Trigger Linking State - Set or Query TRLINKS 5-23


Trigger Source - Set or Query TRSRC 5-25
Units – Set or Query CHUNIT 5-10
Upper Limit Line Value for Simple Limits Checking - LMSUP 5-65
Set or Query

13000-00163 5-5
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

Setup
CHACTIV (Set Active Channel)

CHACTIV? (Query Active Channel)


Set Command: CHACTIV<ws><c>
Details: <c> 1|2
Remarks: Sets the instrument active channel. When operated from the
front panel, channel-based settings will only affect the active
channel.
Note: This setting does not have any effect on GPIB commands
general operation. The user shall be able to change
configuration settings and / or obtain measurement data from a
channel other than the active channel. Data is only available
from the non-active channel when the instrument is operating
in dual channel mode. This reflects front panel operation
where only the displayed channel(s) have data available.
Query Command: CHACTIV?
Return String: CHACTIV <c>
Remarks: Returns the channel currently selected as the active channel.

5-6 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

CHCFG (Set Channel Input Configuration)

CHCFG? (Query Channel Input Configuration)


Set Command: CHCFG<ws><c><,><config>
Details: <c> 1|2
<config> A | B | A – B | B – A | A / B | B / A | V

A Sensor A
B Sensor B
A–B Sensor A minus Sensor B
B–A Sensor B minus Sensor A
A/B Sensor A divided by Sensor B
B/A Sensor B divided by Sensor A
V External Volts
Remarks: Selects the channel input configuration. For single input
channel instruments the choice is restricted to Sensor A or
External Volts (V).
Note: Input Configuration V is only permitted in CW measurement
mode (an execution error will be returned when selecting V in
all other measurement modes).
Query Command: CHCFG?<ws><c>
Return String: CHCFG <c>,<config>
Remarks: Returns the selected channel input configuration.

13000-00163 5-7
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

CHDISPN (Set Number of displayed channels)

CHDISPN? (Query Number of displayed channels)


Set Command: CHDISPN<ws><num_channels>
Details: <num_channels> 1Æ2
Remarks: Sets the instrument to show one or both measurement
channels on the display panel.

Query Command: CHDISPN?


Return String: CHDISPN <num_channels>
Remarks: Returns the setting for the number of displayed channels
selected.

CHMODE (Set Channel Measurement Mode)

CHMODE? (Query Channel Measurement Mode)


Set Command: CHMODE<ws><c><,><mode>
Details: <c> 1|2
<mode> CW | PMOD
CW Continuous Wave measurements
PMOD Pulsed / Modulated measurements
Remarks: This command sets the channel measurement mode. CW
mode supports conventional power meter measurements
using a readout display. In PMOD mode the instrument can
be set up to measure pulsed signals or modulated signals (e.g.
CDMA , TDMA etc.). In PMOD measurement mode, the
measured power can either be viewed as a graphical profile or
as readout display.

Query Command: CHMODE?<ws><c>


Return String: CHMODE <c>,<mode>
Remarks: Returns the selected channel measurement mode setting.

5-8 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

CHRES (Set Channel Decimal Point Resolution)

CHRES? (Query Channel Decimal Point Resolution)


Set Command: CHRES<ws><c><,><dec_places>
Details: <c> 1|2
<dec_places> 1Æ3
Remarks: Set the number of decimal places displayed for the specified
channel.

Query Command: CHRES?<ws><c>


Return String: CHRES <c>,<dec_places>
Remarks: Returns the setting for the selected number of decimal places.

13000-00163 5-9
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

CHUNIT (Set Channel Units)

CHUNIT? (Query Channel Units)


Set Command: CHUNIT<ws><c><,><units>
Details: <c> 1|2
<units> DBM | DBMV | DBUV | DBW | W | V
For sensor input configurations A, B, A – B, B – A the following
units can be selected:
DBM dBm
DBMV dBmV
DBUV dBµV
DBW Dbw
W Watts
V Volts
Note: Non-selectable units:
The channel units displayed on the front panel may differ from
the selected <units> depending on the Channel Input
Configuration settings (see CHCFG command) as follows:
Ratio Measurements:
For sensor input configurations A / B, B / A and Relative
Measurements (see CWREL command) all logarithmic units
will be displayed in ‘dB
When linear units of W (Watts) or V (Volts) are selected and
the sensor input configuration is set to A/B, B/A, the units will
be displayed as % (percentage).
When selecting input configuration EXTV (external volts), units
of Volts (V) will be automatically displayed.
Relative Measurements:
In CW Measurement mode only, when enabling Relative
Measurement the following units will show the letter ‘r’
appended to the suffix unit:
dBr dB relative to a stored value (applies to all logarithmic
units)
%r percentage relative to a stored value (applies to linear
units of Watts and Volts only).
In EXTV (External Volt) input configuration only:
Vr External voltage source relative to a stored voltage.

5-10 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

Remarks: Sets the measurement units for the selected channel.

Query Command: CHUNIT?<ws><c>


Return String: CHUNIT <c>,<units>
Remarks: Returns the units currently set up for the selected channel.

ML243xA command supported

CWSETLP (Set Settle Percentage Value)

CWSETLP? (Query Settle Percentage Value)


Set Command: CWSETLP<ws><c><,><settle_pct>
Details: <c> 1|2
<settle_pct> 0.01Æ 10.00 %
Remarks: The settling percentage determines how long the system waits
for the signal to settle. This allows some control over the trade-
off between speed, and the extent to which a measurement
has settled to its final value.

Query Command: CWSETLP?<ws><c>


Return String: CWSETLP <c>,<settle_pct>
Remarks: Returns the settle percentage configuration setting.

13000-00163 5-11
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

PMDTYP (Set Pulsed/Modulated Measurement Display Type)

PMDTYP? (Query Pulsed/Modulated Measurement Display Type)


Set Command: PMDTYP<ws><c><,><meas_type>
Details: <c> 1|2
<meas_type> PRF | RDO
PRF Profile
RDO Readout
Remarks: Selects the measurement display type for Pulsed/Modulated
Measurement mode.

Query Command: PMDTYP?<ws><c>


Return String: PMDTYP <c>,<meas_type>
Remarks: Returns the Pulsed/Modulated display type setting.

5-12 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

PMMEAS (Set Pulsed/Modulated Measurement Type)

PMMEAS? (Query Pulsed/Modulated Measurement Type)


Set Command: PMMEAS<ws><c><,><meas_type_num>
Details: <c> 1|2
<meas_type_num> 1Æ5
Where <meas_type_num> is:
1: Average Power
2: Average Power, Peak Power
3: Average Power, Peak Power, Crest Factor
4: Average Power, Min Power & Time , Max Power &
Time
5: Average Power, Held Min Power & Time, Held Max
Power & Time
Remarks: Selects the channel pulsed/modulated measurement type. The
measurement type selected is applied to the overall channel
capture time if all gating patterns are disabled. If any gating
patterns are enabled, the measurements will be applied to the
gating patterns instead.

Query Command: PMMEAS?<ws><c>


Return String: PMMEAS <c>,<meas_type_num>
Remarks: Returns Gating pattern measurement type currently selected.

13000-00163 5-13
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

Trigger
PMRRS? (Query RRS Trace State) (ML249xA only)
Query Command: PMRRS?<ws><c>
Details: <c> 1|2
Remarks: Returns the status of the measurement trace when the
instrument is operating in RRS mode.

Return String: PMRRS<c>,<state>


Details: <state> FALSE | FULL | PARTIAL
FALSE: Channel not in RRS mode.
FULL: RRS trace complete.
PARTIAL: RRS trace only partially available.

TRARMD (Set Trigger Arming Mode)

TRARMD? (Query Trigger Arming Mode)


Set Command: TRARMD<ws><c><,><meas_mode><,><arm_mode>
Details: <c> 1|2
<meas_mode> CW | PMOD
<arm_mode> AUTO | SINGLE | FRAME
AUTO Automatically arms the trigger after a
trigger event has occurred.
SINGLE Arms the trigger for a new trigger event
following a user key press.
FRAME Pulsed/Modulated only - Frame-based
trigger arming mode.
Listed below are restrictions on the selection of Trigger Arming
Modes:
Measurement Mode: CW (see CHMODE command)
Trigger Source: INTA | INTB | EXTTL (see
TRSRC command)
Selectable Arming Modes: AUTO | SINGLE
Measurement Mode: PMOD (see CHMODE command)
Trigger Source: INTA | INTB | EXTTL (see
TRSRC command)

5-14 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

Selectable Arming Modes: AUTO | SINGLE | FRAME


Trigger Source: CONT
Selectable Arming Modes: Arming disallowed
Remarks: Sets the trigger Arming Mode. Frame Arming can be used for
burst signals having phase or amplitude based modulation
schemes where large amplitude variations may cause
unwanted re-triggering within the burst. With frame arming the
user specifies a ‘Frame Level’ and a ‘Frame Duration’. This
ensures that triggering will be re-armed only when the signal
has fallen (and stayed) below the ‘Frame Level’ for the ‘Frame
Duration’. (see TRFLEV,TRFTIM commands).
Query Command: TRARMD?<ws><c><,><meas_mode>
Return String: TRARMD <c>,<meas_mode>,<arm_mode>
Remarks: Returns the trigger arming configuration setting for the
selected channel and measurement mode.

TRAUTOS (Set Auto-Triggering State)

TRAUTOS? (Query Auto-Triggering State)


Set Command: TRAUTOS<ws><c><,><state>
Details: <c> 1|2
<state> ON | OFF
Remarks: Turns auto-triggering ON or OFF only for the
Pulsed/Modulated measurement mode on the selected
channel.

Query Command: TRAUTOS?<ws><c>


Return String: TRAUTOS <c>, <state>
Remarks: Returns the auto-triggering state for the Pulsed/Modulated
measurement mode on the selected channel.

13000-00163 5-15
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

TRBW (Set Trigger Bandwidth)

TRBW? (Query Trigger Bandwidth)


Set Command: TRBW<ws><c><,><bandwidth>
Details: <c> 1|2
<bandwidth> 20MHZ | 2MHZ | 200KHZ | 20KHZ
20MHZ Select 20 MHz trigger filter bandwidth.
2MHZ Select 2 MHz trigger filter bandwidth.
200KHZ Select 200 kHz trigger filter bandwidth.
20KHZ Select 20 kHz trigger filter bandwidth.
Remarks: Select the trigger bandwidth to be used for internally triggered
Pulsed/Modulated measurements.
Query Command: TRBW?<ws><c>
Return String: TRBW<ws><c><,><bandwidth>
Remarks: Returns the currently selected trigger bandwidth.

5-16 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

TRCAPT (Set Capture Time)

TRCAPT? (Query Capture Time)


Set Command: TRCAPT<ws><c><,><meas_mode><,><time>[<units>]
Details: <c> 1|2
<meas_mode> CW | PMOD
<time> Valid range for <time> is dependent on
Power Meter model, <meas_mode> setting
and Trigger Source setting (see below).
[<units>] optional suffix units
Pulsed/Modulated Mode - ML248xA model:
<time> 3.125 us Æ 7.000 s ( 200 measurement
display points )
6.250 us Æ 7.000 s ( 400 measurement
display points )
Pulsed/Modulated Mode - ML249xA model:
Trigger source – Continuous (RRS mode not Allowed):
<time> 3.200 us Æ 7.000 s (200 measurement
display points )
6.400 us Æ 7.000 s (400 measurement
display points )
Trigger source - Internal or External (RRS mode allowed):
<time> 50.000 ns Æ 7.000 s (200 & 400
measurement display points )
CW Mode – All models:
<time> 50.000 us Æ 7.000 s
Remarks: Sets the time duration for data collection following a trigger
event. Note that the capture time valid range will be different
depending on the power meter model, <meas_mode> setting
and trigger source setting (see TRSRC and CHMODE
commands)
Notes: <time> can be entered in floating point format or using
suffix_units with the optional <units> parameter. If <units> is
omitted, second(s) will be taken as default.

Query Command: TRCAPT?<ws><c><,><meas_mode>


Return String: TRCAPT <c>,<meas_mode>,<time>
Remarks: Returns the trigger capture time for the selected channel.

13000-00163 5-17
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

TRDLYT (Set Trigger Delay Time)

TRDLYT? (Query Trigger Delay Time)


Set Command: TRDLYT<ws><c><,><meas_mode><,><time>[<units>]
Details: <c> 1|2
<meas_mode> CW | PMOD
<time> (See Below)
[<units>] optional suffix units
Note: Conditions apply to <time> depending on trigger source and
Measurement mode:
Meas Mode: Pulsed / Modulated – Trigger Source: All
<time> Pre-trig delay Æ Post-trig delay
Where:

Pre-trig delay = (-1) x (0.95 x Capture Time )
24 ††
Post-trig delay = (2 –1) / (Sample Rate )

See TRCAPT for information on Capture Time.
††
See TRSAMPL for information on Sample Rate
‘Pre-trig delay’ is defined as a negative trigger delay. The
maximum selectable pre-trigger delay allowed is 0.95 the
selected Capture Time for that channel.
The maximum selectable ‘Post-trig delay’ is dependent on the
Sample Rate. The selectable sample rates will also change
between the ML248xA and ML249xA instrument models.
Meas Mode: CW - Trigger Source: Continuous
<time> 0.00 s (default)
Meas Mode: CW - Trigger Source: Internal | External
<time> 0.00 Æ 999.00 ms
Remarks: Sets the trigger delay time. Note that <time> can be entered in
floating point format or using suffix_units with the optional
<units> parameter. If <units> is omitted, second(s) will be
taken as default.

Query Command: TRDLYT?<ws><c><,><meas_mode>


Return String: TRDLYT<c>,<meas_mode>,<time>
Remarks: Returns the trigger delay time setting.

5-18 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

TRFLEV (Set Trigger Frame Arming Level)

TRFLEV? (Query Trigger Frame Arming Level)


Set Command: TRFLEV<ws><c><,><frm_level>
Details: <c> 1|2
<frm_level> -230.00 dBm Æ +220.00 dBm
Remarks: Sets the Frame Arming amplitude for Pulsed/Modulated
measurements. This parameter will be used with Frame
Arming enabled (see TRARMD command). When the
incoming signal falls below the specified <frm_level> for
‘Frame Duration’ (see TRFTIM), the hardware trigger is re-
armed.
Note: This command applies only to Pulsed/Modulated
Measurements.
Query Command: TRFLEV?<ws><c><,><frm_level>
Return String: TRFLEV <c>,<frm_level>
Remarks: Returns the Frame Arming level setting for the selected
channel.

13000-00163 5-19
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

TRFTIM (Set Trigger Frame Arming Time Duration)

TRFTIM? (Query Trigger Frame Arming Time Duration)


Set Command: TRFTIM<ws><c><,><frm_duration>
Details: <c> 1|2
24
<frm_duration> 0.00 Æ (2 -1) x Sample Period
Where Sample Period is the reciprocal of Sample Rate ( 1 /
Sample Rate ) selected (see TRSAMPL). The range of Sample
Periods is different depending on the instrument type as
follows:
16.0 ns Æ 32.768 us (ML24x9A)
15.625 ns Æ 32.0 us (ML24x8A)

Remarks: Selects the time duration for Frame Arming. This setting is
applied when Frame Arming is enabled (see TRARMD
command). When the signal has fallen below ‘Frame Level’,
the instrument will wait for the specified <frm_duration> before
re-arming the hardware trigger. This command applies only to
Pulsed/Modulated measurements.
Notes: The maximum time selectable for <frm_duration> is
dependent on the selected Sample Rate (see TRSAMPL
command). For example, with the ML24x9A, if the Sample
Rate is set to 62.5Ms/s (i.e. 16.0ns sample period), the
maximum selectable <frm_duration> will be 268.4 ms.
Query Command: TRFTIM?<ws><c>
Return String: TRFTIM <c>,<frm_duration>
Remarks: Returns the Frame Arming time duration setting for the
selected channel.

5-20 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

TRHOFS (Set Trigger Hold-off State) (ML248xA only)

TRHOFS? (Query Trigger Hold-off State) (ML248xA only)


Set Command: TRHOFS<ws><c><,><state>
Details: <c> 1|2
<state> OFF | ON
Remarks: Turns trigger hold off ON or OFF.

Note: This command applies only to Pulsed/Modulated


Measurements
Query Command: TRHOFS?<ws><c>
Return String: TRHOFS <c>,<state>
Remarks: Returns the hold-off state for the selected channel.

TRHOFT (Set Trigger Hold-off Time) (ML248xA only)

TRHOFT? (Query Trigger Hold-off Time) (ML248xA only)


Set Command: TRHOFT<ws><c><,><holdoff_time>
Details: <c> 1|2
<holdoff_time> 0.00 Æ 7.00 seconds
Note: This command applies only to Pulsed/Modulated
Measurements.
Remarks: Selects the time delay between a trigger event occurring and
the trigger being re-armed, when arming mode is set to AUTO
(see TRARMD command). Trigger Holdoff is useful when
wishing to prevent unwanted trigger events from occurring as a
result of noisy signals etc

Query Command: TRHOFT?<ws><c>


Return String: TRHOFT <c>,<holdoff_time>
Remarks: Returns the hold off time currently selected.

13000-00163 5-21
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

TRINEDG (Set Internal Trigger Edge)

TRINEDG? (Query Internal Trigger Edge)


Set Command: TRINEDG<ws><c><,><meas_mode><,><edge>
Details: <c> 1|2
<meas_mode> CW | PMOD
<edge> RISE | FALL
Remarks: Selects the signal edge for internal triggering. This setting
applies only when the trigger source is set to Internal A or
Internal B (see TRSRC command).

Query Command: TRINEDG?<ws><c><,><meas_mode>


Return String: TRINEDG <c>,<meas_mode>,<edge>
Remarks: Returns the status of the internal trigger edge setting.

TRINLEV (Set Internal Trigger Level)

TRINLEV? (Query Internal Trigger Level)


Set Command: TRINLEV<ws><c><,><meas_mode><,><pw_lev>
Details: <c> 1|2
<meas_mode> CW | PMOD
<pw_lev> -230.0 dBm Æ +220.0 dBm
Remarks: If the Trigger source is set to INTA or INTB (internal A or B)
the system triggers on a rising or falling power level edge. Use
this command to set the level to which the signal must rise
above or fall below before the power meter initiates a trigger
event.
Query Command: TRINLEV?<ws><c><,><meas_mode>
Return String: TRINLEV<c>,<meas_mode>,<pw_lev>
Remarks: Returns the trigger power level setting.

5-22 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

TRLINKS (Set Trigger Linking State)

TRLINKS? (Query Trigger Linking State)


Set Command: TRLINKS<ws><state>
Details: <state> OFF | ON
Remarks: This option allows both measurement channels to share the
same measurement triggering set up.
When <state> is set to ON:
- the trigger settings from the ‘ACTIVE’ channel are also
copied to the ‘inactive’ channel.
- Any changes to the trigger settings on either channel
from then on will take effect on both channels.
When <state> is set to OFF:
- The trigger settings at this stage will be exactly identical
on both channels.
- From then on any changes to the trigger setting will affect
only the selected channel.
Note: Both channels must be set to the same measurement mode. If
failing to meet this condition the instrument will produce an
execution error.

Query Command: TRLINKS?


Return String: TRLINKS <state>
Remarks: Returns the status of the trigger link setting.

13000-00163 5-23
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

TRSAMPL (Set Sample Rate)

TRSAMPL? (Query Sample Rate)


Set Command: TRSAMPL<ws><c><,><sample_rate>
Details: <c> 1|2
<sample_rate> AUTO | 31K25 | 62K5 | 125K | 250K |
500K |1M | 2M | 4M | 8M | 16M | 32M |
64M | 31M25 | 62M5
AUTO Instrument determines sample rate
31K25 31.25 ksamples/sec
62K5 62.5 ksamples/sec
125K 125 ksamples/sec
250K 250 ksamples/sec
500K 500 ksamples/sec
1M 1 Msamples/sec
2M 2 Msamples/sec
4M 4 Msamples/sec
8M 8 Msamples/sec
16M 16 Msamples/sec
32M 32 Msamples/sec (ML248xA only)
64M 64 Msamples/sec (ML248xA only)
31M25 31.25 Msamples/sec (ML249xA only)
62M5 64 Msamples/sec (ML249xA only)

Remarks: Sets the sample rate for Pulsed/Modulated measurements on


the selected channel.
Note: Use the appropriate top sample rates depending on the power
meter model (i.e. 32M, 64M for ML248xA and 31M25, 62M5
for the ML249xA). This command applies only to
Pulse/Modulated Measurements.
Query Command: TRSAMPL?<ws><c>
Return String: TRSAMPL <c>,< sample_rate >
Remarks: Returns the sample rate setting for the selected channel.

5-24 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

TRSRC (Set Trigger Source)

TRSRC? (Query Trigger Source)


Set Command: TRSRC<ws><c><,><meas_mode><,><source>
Details: <c> 1|2
<meas_mode> CW | PMOD
<source> CONT | INTA | INTB | EXTTL

CONT Continuous.
INTA | INTB Internally monitoring the RF level at the
specified sensor.
EXTTL External BNC TTL trigger input.
Remarks: Selects the source that the instrument will monitor to initiate a
trigger event. The <meas_mode> parameter allows selection
of which trigger settings to modify independently of the active
channel setup.

Query Command: TRSRC?<ws><c><,><meas_mode>


Return String: TRSRC<c>,<meas_mode>,<source>
Remarks: Returns the status of the trigger source setting.

TRWFPOS (Set Trigger Waveform Position)


Set Command: TRWFPOS<ws><c><,><position>
Details: <c> 1|2
<position> TOP | MIDDLE | BOTTOM | UP | DOWN
TOP Position waveform at the top of the graticule.
MIDDLE Position waveform in the middle of the graticule.
BOTTOM Position waveform at the bottom of the graticule.
UP Move the waveform up by one pixel.
DOWN Move the waveform down by one pixel.

Remarks: Sets the position of the trigger waveform within the graticule.

13000-00163 5-25
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

TRWFS (Set Trigger Waveform State)

TRWFS? (Query Trigger Waveform State)


Set Command: TRWFS<ws><c><,><state>
Details: <c> 1|2
<state> ON | OFF
Remarks: Turns the trigger waveform display on or off.
Query Command: TRWFS?<ws><c>
Return String: TRWFS<ws><c><,><state>
Remarks: Returns the state of the trigger waveform display.

TRXEDG (Set External Trigger Edge)

TRXEDG? (Query External Trigger Edge)


Set Command: TRXEDG<ws><edge>
Details: <edge> RISE | FALL
Remarks: Sets the signal edge on which the internal trigger event will
occur. This setting applies only when the trigger source is set
to external TTL (see TRSRC command).

Query Command: TRXEDG?


Return String: TRXEDG<edge>
Remarks: Returns the status of the external trigger edge setting.

5-26 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

Gating
GP1REPN (Set Gate Pattern 1 Repeat Number)

GP1REPN? (Query Gate Pattern 1 Repeat Number)


Set Command: GP1REPN<ws><c><,><repeat_number>
Details: <c> 1|2
< repeat_number> 2 Æ 8
Remarks: Set the number of times gate pattern 1 is to be repeated.

Query Command: GP1REPN?<ws><c>


Return String: GP1REPN <c>,< repeat_number >
Remarks: Returns gate pattern 1 repeat count.

GP1REPS (Set Gate Pattern 1 Repeat State)

GP1REPS? (Query Gate Pattern 1 Repeat State)


Set Command: GP1REPS<ws><c><,><state>
Details: <c> 1|2
<state> ON | OFF
Remarks: Set/Reset the gate pattern 1 repeat feature.

Query Command: GP1REPS?<ws><c>


Return String: GP1REPS <c>,<state>
Remarks: Returns the state of gate pattern 1 repeat feature.

13000-00163 5-27
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

GP1REPT (Set Gate Pattern 1 Repeat Offset)

GP1REPT? (Query Gate Pattern 1 Repeat Offset)


Set Command: GP1REPT<ws><c><,><time>
Details: <c> 1|2
<time> 0.00 Æ 7.00 s
Remarks: Set gate pattern 1 time offset between successive gates. Time
offset will be the same for all repeated gate patterns.
Query Command: GP1REPT?<ws><c>
Return String: GP1REPT <c>,<time>
Remarks: Returns the time offset for gate pattern 1 repeat.

GPACTN (Set Active Gating Pattern Number)

GPACTN? (Query Active Gating Pattern Number)


Set Command: GPACTN<ws><c><,><gp>
Details: <c> 1|2
<gp> 1Æ4
Remarks: Selects the gating pattern number to be designated as ‘Active’.
Measurements for the active gating pattern are displayed on
the front panel.

Query Command: GPACTN?<ws><c>


Return String: GPACTN <c>,<gp>
Remarks: Returns the active gating pattern number.

5-28 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

GPAMO (Output Active Gating Pattern Measurement)


Query GPAMO<ws><c>
Command:
Details: <c> 1 | 2 | 1&2
Return Channels 1 | 2:
String:
GPAMO <c>,<meas_type>,<agp_data>
Channels 1&2:
GPAMO <c> ,<ch1_meas_type>,<ch1_agp_data>,
<ch2_meas_type>, <ch2_agp_data>
Details: <meas_type>: The measurement type number: 1 Æ 5 (see below)
<agp_data>: The measurements for the active gating pattern.
When selecting channels 1&2, channel 1 readings will be output first,
followed immediately by channel 2 as shown in the return string format
above. Listed below are the measurements provided by <meas_type>
number:
1 Average Power
2 Average Power, Peak Power
3 Average Power, Peak Power, Crest Factor
4 Average Power, Min Power & Time , Max Power & Time
5 Average Power, Held Min Power & Time, Held Max Power & Time
The format of <agp_data> will be different depending upon the selected
measurement type number. A two-letter prefix always precedes the
measurements readings to help decoding the data string:
No. Data Format
1 <gp_num>,<PA>,<avg_pow>
2 <gp_num>,<PA>,<avg_pow>,<PK>,<pk_pow>
3 <gp_num>,<PA>,<avg_pow>,<PK>,<pk_pow>,<CF>,<cres_fact>
4 <gp_num>,<PA>,<avg_pow>,<PN>,<min_pow>,<TN>,<min_time>,
<PX>,<max_pow>,<TX>,<max_time>
5 <gp_num>,<PA>,<avg_pow>,<PHN>,<hmin_pow>,
<THN>,<hmin_time>,<PHX>,<hmax_pow>,<THX>,<hmax_time>
Where:
<gp_num> The active gating pattern number to which the measurements
apply
The two-letter prefixes have the following meanings:
PA Average Power
PK Peak Power

13000-00163 5-29
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

CF Crest Factor
PN Min Power
TN Time of Min Power in units of seconds (s)
PX Max Power
TX Time of Max Power in units of seconds (s)
PHN Held Min Power
PHX Held Max Power
THN Time of Held Min Power in units of seconds (s)
THX Time of Held Max Power in units of seconds (s)

Remarks: When in Pulsed / Modulated mode, this command returns the active
gating pattern readings. Power readings will be returned in the units
currently selected for the measurement channel (see CHUNIT
command). The time readings relate to the time at which the minimum or
maximum power reading occurred relative to the start time of the gate
and it is always returned in units of seconds. The measurement reading
type <meas_type> is selected using the PMMEAS command. An
execution error is raised if there are no enabled gating patterns.
Note that gating pattern numbers 5 Æ 8 will only return a reading if the
Gate1 Repeat Pattern State is enabled (see GP1REPS command) and
Gate1 Repeat Count has been set to 5 Æ 8 (see GP1REPN). An
execution error is returned if either condition is not met.
If all gating patterns are disabled, then the PMRDO command can be
used if wishing to obtain measurement readings over the whole Capture
Time.
Notes: The recommended practice for requesting measurement data over GPIB
is to use TR-type commands to ensure that up-to-date readings are
obtained, in particular after sending configuration commands that affect
the measured power (e.g. sending the SNOFIX command to add an
offset to the measurements). If TR-type commands are not used, a ‘Wait
Delay’ should be introduced between the configuration commands and
the data acquisition command to ensure that any changes to the
instrument set-up have rippled through to the measurement system.

5-30 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

GPARST (Gating Patterns Min/Max Tracking Reset)


Set Command: GPRST<ws><c>
Details: <c> 1|2
Remarks: This command resets the min/max values when the
measurement for Held Max/Min power is selected (see
PMMEAS).
Note: This command should be used for both Enabled Gating
Patterns and overall Capture Time measurements.

GPFENS (Set Fence Number State)

GPFENS? (Query Fence Number State)


Set Command: GPFENS<ws><c><,><gp><,><state>
Details: <c> 1|2
<gp> 1Æ4
<state> OFF | ON
Remarks: Enables the fence for the selected gating pattern.

Query Command: GPFENS?<ws><c><,><gp>


Return String: GPFENS <c>,<gp>,<state>
Remarks: Returns the fence state for the selected gating pattern.

13000-00163 5-31
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

GPFENSP (Set Fence Stop Time)

GPFENSP? (Query Fence Stop Time)


Set Command: GPFENSP<ws><c><,><gp><,><time>
Details: <c> 1|2
<gp> 1Æ4
<time> 0.00 Æ 7.00 s
Remarks: Sets the fence stop time for the gating pattern.

Query Command: GPFENSP?<ws><c><,><gp>


Return String: GPFENSP <c>,<gp>,<time>
Remarks: Returns the fence stop time for the specified gating pattern.

GPFENST (Set Fence Start Time)

GPFENST? (Query Fence Start Time)


Set Command: GPFENST<ws><c><,><gp><,><time>
Details: <c> 1|2
<gp> 1Æ4
<time 0.00 Æ 7.00 s
Remarks: Sets the fence start time for the gating pattern.

Query Command: GPFENST?<ws><c><,><gp>


Return String: GPFENST <c>,<gp>,<time>
Remarks: Returns the fence start time for the specified gating pattern.

5-32 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

GPGATS (Set Gate Number State)

GPGATS? (Query Gate Number State)


Set Command: GPGATS<ws><c><,><gp><,><state>
Details: <c> 1|2
<gp> 1Æ4
<state> OFF | ON
Remarks: Enables/Disables the gating pattern for the selected channel.
Enabling a gating pattern will initiate processing of the
measurements falling within the gate. .
Note: Reading(s) can only be obtained for enabled gating patterns.
The type of readings returned depend upon the
Pulsed/Modulated Measurement type selected (see PMMEAS
command).

Query Command: GPGATS?<ws><c><,><gp>


Return String: GPGATS <c>,<gp>,<state>
Remarks: Returns the state of the selected gating pattern.

GPHIDES (Set Hide Gating Patterns State)

GPHIDES? (Query Hide Gating Patterns State)


Set Command: GPHIDES<ws><c><,><state>
Details: <c> 1|2
<state> OFF | ON
Remarks: Hides (ON) or shows (OFF) the enabled gating patterns line
segments on the instrument display panel.
The gating patterns are still applied enabled and their
measurements still available. This command only removes
them from view.

Query Command: GPHIDES?<ws><c>


Return String: GPHIDES <c>,<state>
Remarks: Returns the state of the gating pattern hide parameter.

13000-00163 5-33
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

GPMO (Output All Enabled Gating Patterns Measurements)


Query GPMO<ws><c>
Command:
Details: <c> 1 | 2 | 1&2
Return For channels 1 | 2 :
String:
GPMO <c>,<gp_count>,<meas_type>, <gp_1_data>, … <gp_n_data>
For channels 1&2 :
GPMO <c>,<ch1_gp_count>,<ch1_meas_type>, <ch1_gp_1_data>, …
<ch1_gp_n_data>,<ch2_gp_count>,<ch2_meas_type>,
<ch2_gp_1_data>, <ch2_gp_n_data>
Details: <gp_count> The total number of enabled gating patterns available.
<meas_type> The measurement type number: 1 Æ 5 (see below).
<gp_n_data> The measurements for each enabled gating pattern.
Note: When selecting channels 1&2, channel 1 readings will be output first,
followed immediately by channel 2 as shown in the return string format
above.
Note that the <gp_ count > range is 1 Æ 4 if Gate1 Repeat Pattern state
is disabled (see GP1REPS command). If enabled, <gp_ count > range is
1 Æ 8, depending on the selection for Gate1Repeat Count (see
GP1REPN).
Listed below are the measurements provided by <meas_type> number:
Number :Measurement Type:
1 Average Power
2 Average Power, Peak Power
3 Average Power, Peak Power, Crest Factor
4 Average Power, Min Power & Time , Max Power & Time
5 Average Power, Held Min Power & Time, Held Max Power &
Time
The format of <gp_n_data> will be different depending upon the selected
measurement type number. A two-letter prefix always precedes the
measurements readings to help decoding the data string:
No. Data Format:
1 <gp_num>,<PA>,<avg_pow>
2 <gp_num>,<PA>,<avg_pow>,<PK>,< pk_pow>
3 <gp_num>,<PA>,<avg_pow>,<PK>,<pk_pow>,<CF>,<cres_fact>
4 <gp_num>,<PA>,<avg_pow>,<PN>,<min_pow>,<TN>,<min_time>,
<PX>,<max_pow>,<TX>,<max_time>
5 <gp_num>,<PA>,<avg_pow>,<PHN>,<hmin_pow>,<THN>,<hmin_ti

5-34 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

me>,<PHX>,<hmax_pow>,<THX>,<hmax_time>
Where:
<gp_num> The gating pattern number to which the
measurements apply.
The two-letter prefixes have the following meanings:
PA Average Power
PK Peak Power
CF Crest Factor
PN Min Power
TN Time of Min Power in units of seconds (s)
PX Max Power
TX Time of Max Power in units of seconds (s)
PHN Held Min Power
PHX Held Max Power
THN Time of Held Min Power in units of seconds (s)
THX Time of Held Max Power in units of seconds (s)
When in Pulsed / Modulated mode, this command returns the selected
measurement readings for all enabled gating patterns. Power readings
will be returned in the units currently selected for the measurement
channel (see CHUNIT command). The time readings relate to the time at
which the minimum or maximum power reading occurred relative to the
start time of the gate and it is always returned in units of seconds. The
measurement readings type <meas_type> is selected using the
PMMEAS command. An execution error is raised if there are no enabled
gating patterns.
Note that gating pattern numbers 5 Æ 8 will only return a reading if the
Gate1 Repeat Pattern State is enabled (see GP1REPS command) and
Gate1 Repeat Count has been set to 5 Æ 8 (see GP1REPN). An
execution error is returned if either condition is not met.
If all gating patterns are disabled, the PMRDO command can be used if
wishing to obtain measurement readings over the whole Capture Time.
Notes: The recommended practice for requesting measurement data over GPIB
is to use TR-type commands to ensure that up-to-date readings are
obtained, in particular after sending configuration commands that affect
the measured power (e.g. sending the SNOFIX command to add an
offset to the measurements). If TR-type commands are not used, a ‘Wait
Delay’ should be introduced between the configuration commands and
the data acquisition command to ensure that any changes to the
instrument set-up have rippled through to the measurement system.

13000-00163 5-35
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

GPNMO (Output Gating Pattern Number Measurement)


Query GPNMO<ws><c><,><gp_num>
Command:
Details: <c> 1 | 2 | 1&2
<gp_num> 1Æ8
Return For channels 1 | 2:
String:
GPNMO <c>,<meas_type>, <gp_n_data>
For channels 1&2:
GPNMO <c>,<ch1_meas_type>,<ch1_gp_n_data>,
<ch2_meas_type>, <ch2_gp_n_data>
Details: When selecting channels 1&2, channel 1 readings will be output first,
followed immediately by channel 2 as shown in the return string format
above.
Listed below are the measurements provided by <meas_type> number:
Number Measurement Type:
1 Average Power
2 Average Power, Peak Power
3 Average Power, Peak Power, Crest Factor
4 Average Power, Min Power & Time , Max Power & Time
5 Average Power, Held Min Power & Time, Held Max Power &
Time
The format of <gp_n_data> will be different depending upon the selected
measurement type number. A two-letter prefix always precedes the
measurement readings to help decode the data string:
No. Data Format
1 <gp_num>,<PA>,<avg_pow>
2 <gp_num>,<PA>,<Avg_pow>,<PK>,<Pk_pow>
3 <gp_num>,<PA>,<Avg_pow>,<PK>,<Pk_pow>,<CF>,<Cres_Fact>
4 <gp_num>,<PA>,<Avg_pow>,<PN>,<min_pow>,<TN>,<min_time>,
<PX>,<max_pow>,<TX>,<max_time>
5 <gp_num>,<PA>,<Avg_pow>,<PHN>,<hmin_pow>,<THN>,<hmin_ti
me>,<PHX>,<hmax_pow>,<THX>,<hmax_time>
Where:
<gp_num> The gating pattern number to which the
measurements apply
The range of <gp_num > will be 1 Æ 4 if Gate1 Repeat Pattern is
disabled (see GP1REPS command).
If enabled, the range will extend to 1 Æ 8, depending on the selection for

5-36 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

Gate1 Repeat Count (see GP1REPN).


The two-letter prefixes have the following meanings:
PA Average Power
PK Peak Power
CF Crest Factor
PN Min Power
TN Time of Min Power in units of seconds (s)
PX Max Power
TX Time of Max Power in units of seconds (s)
PHN Held Min Power
PHX Held Max Power
THN Time of Held Min Power in units of seconds (s)
THX Time of Held Max Power in units of seconds (s)
When in Pulsed / Modulated mode this command returns the specified
gating pattern readings. Power readings will be returned in the units
currently selected for the measurement channel. The timing readings
relate to the time at which the minimum or maximum power reading
occurred with respect to the trigger point and it is always returned in units
of seconds. An execution error is returned if there are no enabled gating
patterns. The measurement type is selected using the PMMEAS
command.
Gating pattern numbers 5 Æ 8 will only return a reading if Gate1 Repeat
Pattern is enabled (see GP1REPS command) and Gate1 Repeat Count
has been set to 5 Æ 8 (see GP1REPN). An execution error is returned if
either condition is not met.
If all gating patterns are disabled, using the PMRDO command will return
measurement readings over the whole Capture Time.
Notes: The recommended practice for requesting measurement data over GPIB
is to use TR-type commands to ensure that up-to-date readings are
obtained, in particular after sending configuration commands that affect
the measured power (e.g. sending the SNOFIX command to add an
offset to the measurements). If TR-type commands are not used, a ‘Wait
Delay’ should be introduced between the configuration commands and
the data acquisition command to ensure that any changes to the
instrument set-up have rippled through to the measurement system.

13000-00163 5-37
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

GPOFF (Switch OFF Gating Patterns)


Set Command: GPOFF<ws><c>
Details: <c> 1|2
Remarks: Turns OFF all enabled gating patterns including the active
gating pattern. This action will end internal processing of
measurements associated to gating patterns. The gating
patterns definitions however remain unchanged.
Note: By definition each Gating Patten can be thought of as a single
entity, which includes a Gate and a Fence pair. A Fence is
always associated with its corresponding Gate and cannot be
used on its own. The ‘Gate Enable’ setting (see GPGATS
command) has overall control over the Fence as well.
Therefore, using the GPOFF command will turn the ‘Gate
Enable’ setting OFF and also override its associated ‘Fence
Enable’ state. When sending a GPOFF command the
following settings will remain unchanged, but will not be active:

Gate Start Time


Gate Stop Time
Fence State
Fence Start Time
Fence Stop Time
Gating Pattern 1 Repeat State
Gating Pattern 1 Repeat Number
Gating Pattern 1 Repeat Offset

After having issued the GPOFF command, if the user should


wish to re-enable Gating Pattern 1, by turning the ‘Gate
Enable’ setting ON, the associated Gate, Fence and Gating
Pattern 1 Repeat settings listed above will also take effect.

5-38 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

GPTIMSP (Set Gate Stop Time)

GPTIMSP? (Query Gate Stop Time)


Set Command: GPTIMSP<ws><c><,><gp><,><time>
Details: <c> 1|2
<gp> 1Æ4
<time> 0.00 Æ 7.00 s
Remarks: Sets the gate stop time for the selected gating pattern.

Query Command: GPTIMSP?<ws><c><,><gp>


Return String: GPTIMSP <c>,<gp>,<time>
Remarks: Returns the gate stop time for the specified gating pattern.

GPTIMST (Set Gate Start Time)

GPTIMST? (Query Gate Start Time)


Set Command: GPTIMST<ws><c><,><gp><,><time>
Details: <c> 1|2
<gp> 1Æ4
<time> 0.00 Æ 7.00 s
Remarks: Sets the gate start time for the selected gating pattern.
Query Command: GPTIMST?<ws><c><,><gp>
Return String: GPTIMST <c>,<gp>,<time>
Remarks: Returns the gate start time for the specified gating pattern.

13000-00163 5-39
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

Relative Measurement
ML243xA command supported

CWREL (Relative Mode Control)

CWREL? (Query Relative Mode Control)


Set Command: CWREL<ws><c><,><mode>
Details: <c> 1|2
<mode> 0 Turn OFF
1 Turn ON and reference
2 Turn ON, use old references if not first time.
Remarks: This command sets the relative mode for CW measurements.
Immediately after turning ‘Relative mode’ ON, the instrument
will take a reading of the measured power and use it as a
reference value thereafter for all subsequent measurements.
The measurements returned over GPIB from then on will be
relative to the reference power.
For linear units of Watts (W), in relative mode, the returned
readings will be as percentage relative to the reference value
(%r). All logarithmic units will be returned in dB relative to the
reference value (dBr).
Note: When selecting <mode> to be 1, the instrument will always
take a new reference reading (this is the equivalent of toggling
the ‘Relative’ button ON from the front panel, then pressing the
‘Reset’ button). When selecting <mode> to be 2, the
instrument will use the old reference value, unless there is no
reference value stored (e.g. When switching ON a new unit for
the first time or following a software upgrade).

Query Command: CWREL?<ws><c>


Return String: CWREL <c>,<mode>
Remarks: Returns the state of Relative Mode.

5-40 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

Averaging
CWAVG (Set CW Averaging Mode)

CWAVG? (Query CW Averaging Mode)


Set Command: CWAVG<ws><c><,> [<mode>]<,>[<avg_num>]
Details: <c> 1|2
<mode> OFF | MOV | RPT | AUTO

<avg_num> 1 Æ 512 (Applies only to MOV and RPT


averaging)
OFF Averaging OFF
MOV MOVING Average
RPT REPEAT Averaging
AUTO AUTOMATIC Averaging
Remarks: Moving averaging uses a sliding-window type of averaging.
The width of the sliding window is defined by <avg_num>. In
this mode the returned measurement update is at every
sample.
Repeat averaging only returns a reading when the number of
samples specified by <avg_num> has been taken. The
process will re-start each time with a fresh set of samples.
AUTOMATIC averaging is similar to MOVING averaging. The
averaging number is selected internally to provide optimum
speed versus settling of samples over the GPIB interface.
In AUTOMATIC averaging the user-defined <avg_num> is not
used, but the user may send the CWAVG command to select
AUTOMATIC averaging mode and also include <avg_num>.
This will in effect also update the <avg_num> setting.
Examples:
CWAVG 1, AUTO, 64 This command will set the system to
AUTO averaging and the
<avg_num> averaging number to
64.
CWAVG 1, AUTO, Change Channel 1 to Auto
Averaging (note the comma
following AUTO even though the
<avg_num> parameter is not being
sent).
CWAVG 2, MOV, 32 Change Channel 2 to Moving
average and the User Average
number to 32.

13000-00163 5-41
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

CWAVG 1, RPT, Change Channel 1 to Repeat


average and keep the User Average
number as 32.
CWAVG 1, , 128 Change Channel 1 User Average
number to 128, but keep the
previously set averaging mode (note
comma to indicate the <mode>
parameter is not being sent).

Query Command: CWAVG?<ws><c>


Return String: CWAVG <c>,<mode>,<avg_num>
Remarks: Returns the averaging mode for the selected channel. Note
that when channel averaging <mode> is OFF or AUTO the
<avg_num> field will default to 1. For all other settings the
selected averaging number will be returned.

PMAVGN (Set Profile Sweep Averaging Number)

PMAVGN? (Query Profile Sweep Averaging Number)


Set Command: PMAVGN<ws><c><,><value>
Details: <c> 1|2
<value> 1 Æ 512
Remarks: Sets the sweep averaging number for the Pulsed/Modulated
measurement mode.
The instrument will calculate a point-by-point average on N
trace sweeps (where N is the Sweep Averaging Number),
before updating the displayed profile. When the Sweep
Averaging Number is reached, a moving type of average will
be applied from then on.

Query Command: PMAVGN?<ws><c>


Return String: PMAVGN <c>,<value>
Remarks: Returns the setting for the sweep averaging number.

5-42 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

PMAVGS (Set Pulsed/Modulated Profile Averaging State)

PMAVGS? (Query Pulsed/Modulated Profile Averaging State)


Set Command: PMAVGS<ws><c><,><state>
Details: <c> 1|2
<state> OFF | ON
Remarks: Sets the Pulsed/Modulated Sweep Averaging state.

Query Command: PMAVGS?<ws><c>


Return String: PMAVGS <c>,<state>
Remarks: Returns the state of Pulsed/Modulated Sweep Averaging
setting.

PMAVRST (Reset Pulsed/Modulated Profile Averaging)


Set Command: PMAVRST<ws><c>
Details: <c> 1|2
Remarks: If Pulsed/Modulated Sweep Averaging is set to ON (see
PMAVGS command), this command will restart the profile
sweep averaging.

PMPDRST (Reset Pulsed/Modulated Profile)


Set Command: PMPDRST<ws><c>
Details: <c> 1|2
Remarks: Resets the profile data points when the Pulsed/Modulated
min/max tracking mode is set to ‘Infinite’ (see PMPTRK
command) and the Data Representation Type is set to MIN,
MAX or MIN&MAX (see PMPDREP command). The
command will be ignored if the Data Representation Type is
set to NORM.

13000-00163 5-43
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

Duty Cycle
CWDUTY (Set Duty Cycle Value)

CWDUTY? (Query Duty Cycle Value)


Set Command: CWDUTY<ws><c><,><duty_pct>
Details: <c> 1|2
<duty_pct> 0.10 Æ 100.00 %
Remarks: This command applies the duty cycle value to the selected
channel. Duty cycle can be used when measuring pulsed
signals in CW measurement mode and wishing to extract the
pulse power from an average power reading (for example a
reading from a MA2421A thermal sensor). Note that the duty-
cycle corrected pulse power reading is only an approximation
and assumes constant peak power.
Use the power meter in Pulsed/Modulated mode with an
MA2491A sensor to obtain accurate peak power
measurements.
Query Command: CWDUTY?<ws><c>
Return String: CWDUTY <c>,<duty_pct>
Remarks: Returns the duty cycle value for the selected channel.

CWDUTYS (Set Duty Cycle State)

CWDUTYS? (Query Duty Cycle State)


Set Command: CWDUTYS<ws><c><,><state>
Details: <c> 1|2
<state> OFF | ON
Remarks: Turns the duty cycle for the selected channel on or off.

Query Command: CWDUTYS?<ws><c>


Return String: CWDUTYS <c>,<state>
Remarks: Returns the duty cycle state for the selected channel.

5-44 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

Markers
MKACTN (Set Active Marker)

MKACTN? (Query Active Markers)


Set Command: MKACTN<ws><c><,><marker_num>
Details: <c> 1|2
<marker_num> 1Æ4
Note: A marker must be made active before it is moved.
Remarks: Sets the selected marker to be the active marker. When made
active, the marker can subsequently move along the time axis.

Query Command: MKACTN?<ws><c>


Return String: MKACTN <c>,<marker_num>
Remarks: Returns the active marker number.

13000-00163 5-45
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

MKACTO (Output Active Marker Readings)


Query Command: MKACTO<ws><c>
Details: <c> 1 | 2 | 1&2
Return String: For channels 1 | 2:
MKACTO <c>,<mk_num>,<mk_n_data>
For channels 1&2:
MKACTO<c>,<ch1_mk_num>,<ch1_mk_n_data>,<ch2_mk_num>,
<ch2_mk_n_data>
Details: <mk_num> The active marker number
<mk_n_data> The measurements for the active marker

The format of <mk_n_data> is as follows:


<mk_pow>,< mk_p_unit_type >,<mk_time>

<mk_pow> The marker power reading ( 1Æ 4)


<mk_p_unit_type> The unit type for the power reading
(Depending on the current measurement units
for the selected channel)
<mk_time> The time reference for the power reading.
Remarks: Returns the active marker reading. If no markers are enabled, an
execution error is returned. When selecting channels 1&2,
channel 1 readings will be output first, followed immediately by
channel 2 as shown in the return string format above.
Notes: The recommended practice for requesting measurement data over
GPIB is to use TR-type commands to ensure that up-to-date
readings are obtained, in particular after sending configuration
commands that affect the measured power (e.g. sending the
SNOFIX command to add an offset to the measurements). If TR-
type commands are not used, a ‘Wait Delay’ should be introduced
between the configuration commands and the data acquisition
command to ensure that any changes to the instrument set-up
have rippled through to the measurement system.

5-46 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

MKAOFF (Switch All Markers Off )


Set Command: MKAOFF<ws><c>
Details: <c> 1|2
Remarks: All markers are switched off. Following this command, markers
will no longer be visible on the front panel and readings will not
be available over GPIB.

MKAPOS (Set Active Marker Position)

MKAPOS? (Query Active Marker Position)


Set Command: MKAPOS<ws><c><,><time>[<units>]
Details: <c> 1|2
<time> See notes below
[<units>] NS | US | MS | S
Remarks: Sets the active marker to the specified position on the
measurement profile time axis. The marker will return the
current reading at that position (using any of the Markers Data
Acquisition commands). Note that markers can ONLY be
moved within the profile capture time currently set. The
instrument will ignore this command if sending a <time> that
exceeds the capture time. An execution error will be returned
if the selected marker is disabled. This command can be
issued to control any enabled marker regardless of the current
active marker.
Note: The marker search is carried out on a 200 or 400 point
measurement data set depending on the Display Resolution
setting (see SYDRES command). The marker x-axis
resolution is therefore a function of Capture Time and Display
Resolution. If the marker is moved over GPIB by a finer
increment than the current display resolution, the instrument
shall return the measurement reading from the nearest data
point.

Query Command: MKAPOS? <ws><c>


Return String: MKAPOS<c>,<active_mkr_num>,<time>
<active_mkr_num> The marker number currently assigned
as active.
Remarks: Returns the active marker number and position along the
trace.

13000-00163 5-47
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

MKDELTS (Set Delta Marker Enable State)

MKDELTS? (Query Delta Marker Enable State)


Set Command: MKDELTS<ws><c><,><state>
Details: <c> 1|2
<state> OFF | ON
Remarks: Enables the delta marker. There must be an enabled active
marker for the delta marker to operate. If no markers are
enabled, on executing this command the instrument will also
enable the last used active marker. Following the above action
the default /user-selected delta marker readings will be
available.

Query Command: MKDELTS?<ws><c>


Return String: MKDELTS<c>,<state>
Remarks: Returns the enable state of the delta marker.

5-48 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

MKDLINK (Set Delta Markers Link State)

MKDLINK? (Query Delta Markers Link State)


Set Command: MKDLINK<ws><c><,><state>
Details: <c> 1|2
<state> OFF | ON
Remarks: Links the delta marker to the active marker, so that they can
be moved together as a pair.

Query Command: MKDLINK?<ws><c>


Return String: MKDLINK <c>,<state>
Remarks: Returns the delta marker link state.

MKDMEAS (Set Delta Marker Measurement Type)

MKDMEAS? (Query Delta Marker Measurement Type)


Set Command: MKDMEAS<ws><c><,><meas_type>
Details: <c> 1|2
<meas_type> PDIFF | PAVG
PDIFF Power Difference
PAVG Average Power
Remarks: Selects the delta marker measurement type to be displayed on
the front panel or returned over GPIB.

Query Command: MKDMEAS?<ws><c>


Return String: MKDMEAS<c>,<meas_type>
Remarks: Returns the delta marker measurement type currently
selected.

13000-00163 5-49
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

MKDO (Output Delta Marker Readings)


Query Command: MKDO<ws><c>
Details: <c> 1 | 2 | 1&2
Return String: For channels 1 | 2:
MKDO <c>,<dmkr_data>
For channels 1&2:
MKDO <c>,<ch1_dmkr_data>,<ch2_dmkr_data>
Details: The format of < dmkr_data > is as follows:
< meas_type >,<dmk_meas_data>,<units>,<dmk_time>

<meas_type> PDIFF | PAVG


<dmk_meas_data> Measurement data value
<units> Current measurement units
<dmk_time> Marker time position
Remarks: Returns the delta marker readings. If the marker is disabled
an error is flagged. When selecting channels 1&2, channel 1
readings will be output first, followed immediately by channel 2
as shown in the return string format above.
Note: The recommended practice for requesting measurement data
over GPIB is to use TR-type commands to ensure that up-to-
date readings are obtained, in particular after sending
configuration commands that affect the measured power (e.g.
sending the SNOFIX command to add an offset to the
measurements). If TR-type commands are not used, a ‘Wait
Delay’ should be introduced between the configuration
commands and the data acquisition command to ensure that
any changes to the instrument set-up have rippled through to
the measurement system.

5-50 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

MKDPOS (Set Delta Marker Position)

MKDPOS? (Query Delta Marker Position)


Set Command: MKDPOS<ws><c><,><time>[<units>]
Details: <c> 1|2
<time> See notes below
[<units>] NS | US | MS | S
Remarks: Sets the delta marker to the specified position on the
measurement profile time axis. The marker will return the
current reading at that position (using any of the Markers Data
Acquisition commands). Note that markers can ONLY be
moved within the profile capture time currently set. The
instrument will ignore this command if sending a <time> that
exceeds the capture time. An execution error will be returned
if the selected marker is disabled. This command can be
issued to control any enabled marker regardless of the current
active marker.
Note: The marker search is carried out on a 200 or 400 point
measurement data set depending on the Display Resolution
setting (see SYDRES command). The marker x-axis
resolution is therefore a function of Capture Time and Display
Resolution. If the marker is moved over GPIB by a finer
increment then the current display resolution, the instrument
shall return the measurement reading from the nearest data
point.

Query Command: MKDPOS? <ws><c>


Return String: MKDPOS <c>,<time>
Remarks: Returns the delta marker position on the time axis.

13000-00163 5-51
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

MKENO (Output All Enabled Markers Readings)


Query Command: MKENO<ws><c>
Details: <c> 1 | 2 | 1&2
Return String: For channels 1 | 2:
MKENO <c>,<mk_count>,<mk_1_data>, … <mk_n_data>
For channels 1&2:
MKENO <c>,<ch1_mk_count>,<ch1_mk_1_data>, …
<ch1_mk_n_data> <ch2_mk_count>,<ch2_mk_1_data>, …
<ch2_mk_n_data>
Details: <mk_count> The number of enabled markers
<mk_n_data> The measurements for each enabled marker
The format of <mk_n_data> is as follows:
<mk_num>,<mk_pow>,< mk_p_unit_type >,<mk_time>
<mk_num> The marker number
<mk_pow> The marker power reading
<mk_p_unit_type> The unit type for the power reading
(Depending on the current measurement
units for the selected channel)
<mk_time> The time reference for the power reading
Remarks: Returns readings for all enabled markers. If no markers are
enabled an execution error is returned.
When selecting channels 1&2, channel 1 readings will be
output first, followed immediately by channel 2 as shown in the
return string format above.
Notes: The recommended practice for requesting measurement data
over GPIB is to use TR-type commands to ensure that up-to-
date readings are obtained, in particular after sending
configuration commands that affect the measured power (e.g.
sending the SNOFIX command to add an offset to the
measurements). If TR-type commands are not used, a ‘Wait
Delay’ should be introduced between the configuration
commands and the data acquisition command to ensure that
any changes to the instrument set-up have rippled through to
the measurement system.

5-52 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

MKNO (Output Marker Number Reading)


Query MKNO<ws><c><,><mk_num>
Command:
Details: <c> 1 | 2 | 1&2
<mk_num> 1Æ4
Return For channels 1 | 2:
String:
MKNO <c>,<mk_num>,<mk_n_data>
For channels 1&2:
MKNO<c>,<ch1_mk_num>,<ch1_mk_n_data>,<ch2_mk_num>,<ch2_mk_n_data>
Details: <mk_num> The marker number selected.
<mk_n_data> The measurements for the selected marker.
The format of <mk_n_data> is as follows:
<mk_pow>,< mk_p_unit_type >,<mk_time>

<mk_pow> The marker power reading


<mk_p_unit_type> The unit type for the power reading (Depending on the current
measurement units for the selected channel)
<mk_time> The time reference for the power reading.
Remarks: Returns the measurement reading for the selected marker. If the marker is
disabled an execution error is returned. When selecting channels 1&2, channel 1
readings will be output first, followed immediately by channel 2 as shown in the
return string format above.
Notes: The recommended practice for requesting measurement data over GPIB is to use
TR-type commands to ensure that up-to-date readings are obtained, in particular
after sending configuration commands that affect the measured power (e.g.
sending the SNOFIX command to add an offset to the measurements). If TR-type
commands are not used, a ‘Wait Delay’ should be introduced between the
configuration commands and the data acquisition command to ensure that any
changes to the instrument set-up have rippled through to the measurement
system.

13000-00163 5-53
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

MKPFTO (Output Pulse Fall Time)


Query Command: MKPFTO <ws><c>
Details: <c> 1 | 2 | 1&2
Return String: MKPFTO <c>,<pf_time>
Details: <pf_time> 0.00 Æ 7.00 s
Remarks: Advanced marker functions command. Returns the selected
pulse shape fall time. This function relies on the user
positioning the active marker within the pulse shape. If
attempting to obtain a reading over GPIB, as a minimum, the
user should obtain the position of the pulse on the time axis.
The active marker can be used to return a measurement
reading to ensure the correct position of the pulse is found.
The time reference obtained can be subsequently entered for
the <mkf_time> parameter to return the Pulse Fall Time.
Notes: The recommended practice for requesting measurement data
over GPIB is to use TR-type commands to ensure that up-to-
date readings are obtained, in particular after sending
configuration commands that affect the measured power (e.g.
sending the SNOFIX command to add an offset to the
measurements). If TR-type commands are not used, a ‘Wait
Delay’ should be introduced between the configuration
commands and the data acquisition command to ensure that
any changes to the instrument set-up have rippled through to
the measurement system.

5-54 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

MKPOS (Set Marker Position)

MKPOS? (Query Marker Position)


Set Command: MKPOS<ws><c><,><marker_num><,><time>[<units>]
Details: <c> 1|2
<marker_num> 1Æ4
<time> See notes below
[<units>] NS | US | MS | S
Remarks: Sets the selected marker to the specified position on the
measurement profile time axis. The marker will return the
current reading at that position (using any of the Markers Data
Acquisition commands). Note that markers can ONLY be
moved within the profile capture time currently set. The
instrument will ignore this command if sending a <time> that
exceeds the capture time. An execution error will be returned
if the selected marker is disabled. This command can be
issued to control any enabled marker regardless of the current
active marker.
Note: The range for <time> depends upon the selected Capture
Time.
The marker search is carried out on a 200 or 400 point
measurement data set depending on the Display Resolution
setting (see SYDRES command). The marker x-axis
resolution is therefore a function of Capture Time and Display
Resolution. If the marker is moved over GPIB by a finer
increment then the current display resolution, the instrument
shall return the measurement reading from the nearest data
point.

Query Command: MKPOS?<ws><c><,><marker_num>


Return String: MKPOS <c>,<marker_num>,<time>
Remarks: Returns the selected marker time.

13000-00163 5-55
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

MKPOTO (Output Pulse Off Time)


Query Command: MKPOTO <ws><c>
Details: <c> 1 | 2 | 1&2
Return String: MKPOTO<c>,<po_time>
Details: <po_time> 0.00 Æ 7.00 s
Remarks: Advanced marker functions command. Returns the selected
pulse shape width. This function relies on the user positioning
the active marker within the pulse shape.
Notes: If attempting to obtain a reading over GPIB, as a minimum, the
user should obtain the position of the pulse on the time axis.
The active marker can be used to return a measurement
reading to ensure the correct position of the pulse is found.
The time reference obtained can be subsequently entered for
the <mkf_time> parameter to return the Pulse Off Time.
Notes: The recommended practice for requesting measurement data
over GPIB is to use TR-type commands to ensure that up-to-
date readings are obtained, in particular after sending
configuration commands that affect the measured power (e.g.
sending the SNOFIX command to add an offset to the
measurements). If TR-type commands are not used, a ‘Wait
Delay’ should be introduced between the configuration
commands and the data acquisition command to ensure that
any changes to the instrument set-up have rippled through to
the measurement system.

5-56 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

MKPRIO (Output Pulse Repetition Interval)


Query Command: MKPRIO<ws><c>
Details: <c> 1|2
Return String: MKPRIO<c>,<mkf_time>
Details: <mkf_time> 0.00 to 7.00 s
Remarks: Advanced marker functions command. Returns the Pulse
Repetition Interval (PRI) of the selected pulse shape. This
function relies on the user positioning the active marker within
the pulse shape. If attempting to obtain a reading over GPIB,
as a minimum, the user should obtain the position of the pulse
on the time axis. The active marker can be used to return a
measurement reading to ensure the correct position of the
pulse is found. The time reference obtained can be
subsequently entered for the <mkf_time> parameter to return
the Pulse Repetition Interval.
Notes: The recommended practice for requesting measurement data
over GPIB is to use TR-type commands to ensure that up-to-
date readings are obtained, in particular after sending
configuration commands that affect the measured power (e.g.
sending the SNOFIX command to add an offset to the
measurements). If TR-type commands are not used, a ‘Wait
Delay’ should be introduced between the configuration
commands and the data acquisition command to ensure that
any changes to the instrument set-up have rippled through to
the measurement system.

13000-00163 5-57
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

MKPRTO (Output Pulse Rise Time)


Query Command: MKPRTO <ws><c>
Details: <c> 1 | 2 | 1&2
Return String: MKPRTO <c>,<pr_time>
Details: <pr_time> 0.00 Æ 7.00 s
Remarks: Advanced marker function command. Returns the selected
pulse shape rise time. This function relies on the user
positioning the active marker inside the pulse shape. If
attempting to obtain a reading over GPIB, as a minimum, the
user should obtain the position of the pulse on the time axis.
The active marker can be used to return a measurement
reading to ensure the correct position of the pulse is found.
The time reference obtained can be subsequently entered for
the <pr_time> parameter to return the Pulse Rise Time.
Notes: The recommended practice for requesting measurement data
over GPIB is to use TR-type commands to ensure that up-to-
date readings are obtained, in particular after sending
configuration commands that affect the measured power (e.g.
sending the SNOFIX command to add an offset to the
measurements). If TR-type commands are not used, a ‘Wait
Delay’ should be introduced between the configuration
commands and the data acquisition command to ensure that
any changes to the instrument set-up have rippled through to
the measurement system.

MKPSLT (Set Advanced Marker Search Lower Target)

MKPSLT? (Query Advanced Marker Search Lower Target)


Set Command: MKPSLT<ws><c><,><value>
Details: <c> 1|2
<value> 1.00 % to 99.00 %
Remarks Sets the advanced marker search lower target value.
Query Command: MKPSLT?<ws><c>
Return String: MKPSLT <c>,<value>
Remarks: Returns the lower target’s current value.

5-58 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

MKPSSV (Set Advanced Marker Search Start Value Source)

MKPSSV? (Query Advanced Marker Search Start Value Source)


Set Command: MKPSSV<ws><c><,><source>
Details: <c> 1|2
<source> MARKER | GATE
MARKER The active marker power value is used to
start the search from.
GATE The active gate’s average power value is
used to start the search from.
Remarks Sets the source of the power value that the advanced marker
search is started from.
Query Command: MKPSSV?<ws><c>
Return String: MKPSSV <c>,<source>
Remarks: Returns the current source of the advanced marker search
start value.

MKPSUT (Set Advanced Marker Search Upper Target)

MKPSUT? (Query Advanced Marker Search Upper Target)


Set Command: MKPSUT<ws><c><,><value>
Details: <c> 1|2
<value> 1.00 % to 99.00 %
Remarks Sets the advanced marker search upper target value.
Query Command: MKPSUT?<ws><c>
Return String: MKPSUT <c>,<value>
Remarks: Returns the upper target’s current value.

13000-00163 5-59
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

MKPWTO (Output Pulse Width)


Query Command: MKPWTO <ws><c>
Details: <c> 1 | 2 | 1&2
Return String: MKPWTO<c>,<pw_time>
Details: <pw_time> 0.00 Æ 7.00 s
Remarks: Advanced marker functions command. Returns the selected
pulse shape width. This function relies on the user positioning
the active marker within the pulse shape. If attempting to
obtain a reading over GPIB, as a minimum, the user should
obtain the position of the pulse on the time axis. The active
marker can be used to return a measurement reading to
ensure the correct position of the pulse is found. The time
reference obtained can be subsequently entered for the
<pw_time> parameter to return the Pulse Width.
Notes: The recommended practice for requesting measurement data
over GPIB is to use TR-type commands to ensure that up-to-
date readings are obtained, in particular after sending
configuration commands that affect the measured power (e.g.
sending the SNOFIX command to add an offset to the
measurements). If TR-type commands are not used, a ‘Wait
Delay’ should be introduced between the configuration
commands and the data acquisition command to ensure that
any changes to the instrument set-up have rippled through to
the measurement system.

5-60 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

MKSTATE (Set Markers State)

MKSTATE? (Query Markers State)


Set Command: MKSTATE<ws><c><,><marker_num><,><state>
Details: <c> 1|2
<marker_num> 1Æ4
<state> OFF | ON
Remarks: Enables the selected marker. If set to ON, this command will
display the selected marker on the instrument front panel and
make a reading available depending on the marker position.

Query Command: MKSTATE?<ws><c><,><marker_num>


Return String: MKSTATE<c>,<marker_num>,<state>
Remarks: Returns the state of the selected marker.

MKTMAX (Position Active Marker to Maximum)


Set Command: MKTMAX<ws><c>
Details: <c> 1|2
Remarks: Places the active marker at the maximum point on the trace. If
no markers are enabled the default active marker will be
enabled before is moved. The reading can be obtained with
the MKACTO command.

MKTMIN (Move Active Marker to Minimum)


Set Command: MKTMIN<ws><c>
Details: <c> 1|2
Remarks: Places the active marker at the minimum point on the trace. If
no markers are enabled the default active marker will be
enabled before is moved. The reading can be obtained with
the MKACTO command.

13000-00163 5-61
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

Limit Checking
ML243xA command supported

LMFBEEP (Set Fail Beep Control)

LMFBEEP? (Query Fail Beep Control)


Set Command: LMFBEEP<ws><c><,><state>
Details: <c> 1|2
<state> OFF | ON
Remarks: When ON, causes an audio beep every time the limits for the
selected channel fail. If LMFBEEP is ON, and LMFHOLD is
ON, whenever the limits specified for the channel have been
exceeded, a beep sounds once every second until LMFHOLD
is turned OFF, or the CLEAR key (CLR) is pressed. The FAIL
indication is not affected by the CLEAR key, and can only be
cleared by turning LMFHOLD off. If a limit fail happens again,
the alarm will sound again.
Query Command: LMFBEEP?<ws><c>
Return String: LMFBEEP <c>,<state>
Remarks: Returns the state of the fail beep control setting.

LMFCLR (Clear Limit Failure Indicator)


Set Command: LMFCLR<ws><c>
Details: <c> 1|2
Remarks: When Fail Hold is enabled, this command will clear any limit
failure indicators.

5-62 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

ML243xA command supported

LMFHOLD (Set Fail Indicator Hold)

LMFHOLD? (Query Fail Indicator Hold)


Set Command: LMFHOLD<ws><c><,><state>
Details: <c> 1|2
<state> OFF | ON
Remarks: If a failure is detected on either Upper or Lower limits, and this
setting is turned ON, the failure indicators will continue to issue
a limit failure until this command is issued again to turn the Fail
Indicator Hold OFF. All BNC outputs, beeps and displays
continue to be in the 'fail' state until after the OFF is received.
Query Command: LMFHOLD?<ws><c>
Return String: LMFHOLD <c>,<state>
Remarks: Returns the state of the fail indicator hold setting.

LMLINE (Set Limit Line Test Type)

LMLINE? (Query Limit Line Test Type)


Set Command: LMLINE<ws><c><,><limit_line>
Details: <c> 1|2
<limit_line> BOTH | UPPER | LOWER
Remarks: This command allows selection of the limit lines to be applied
to the measurements for limit checking.

Query Command: LMLINE?<ws><c>


Return String: LMLINE <c>,<limit_line>
Remarks: Returns the selected limit lines for limit checking of the
measurements.

13000-00163 5-63
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

ML243xA command supported

LMSLO (Set Lower Limit Line Value for Simple Limits Checking)

LMSLO? (Query Lower Limit Line Value for Simple Limits


Checking)
Set Command: LMSLO<ws><c><,><limit_val>
Details: <c> 1|2
<limit_val> –999.99 Æ+999.99 E+06
Remarks: Set the lower limit value for simple limit checking. The value of
<limit_val> is regarded as ‘unit-less’ number; hence <limit_val>
magnitude will be checked against the current measurements
regardless of the instrument’s currently selected units. The
user must ensure that <limit_val> is consistent with the
selected measurement units.
Note: The instrument will not carry out a unit conversion if different
measurement units are selected.

Query Command: LMSLO?<ws><c>


Return String: LMSLO <c>,<limit_val>
Remarks: Return the current value for the lower limit line.

LMSTATE (Set Limit Checking State)

LMSTATE? (Query Limit Checking State)


Set Command: LMSTATE<ws><c><,><state>
Details: <c> 1|2
<state> OFF | ON
Remarks: Enables limit checking on the selected channel.

Query Command: LMSTATE?<ws><c>


Return String: LMSTATE <c>,<state>
Remarks: Returns the selected channel limit checking status.

5-64 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

ML243xA command supported

LMSUP (Set Upper Limit Line Value for Simple Limits Checking)

LMSUP? (Query Upper Limit Line Value for Simple Limits


Checking)
Set Command: LMSUP<ws><c><,><limit_val>
Details: <c> 1|2
<limit_val> –999.99 Æ+999.99 E+06
Remarks: Sets the upper limit power value for simple limit checking.
Note that <limit_val> is regarded as a ‘unitless’ number; this
means that the magnitude of <limit_val> will be used to check
the limits against the current measurements, regardless of the
units selected for the current channel. The user must ensure
that the magnitude of <limit_val> is consistent with the
intended measurement units for which the measurements are
to be limit checked.
Note: The instrument will not carry out a unit conversion if different
measurement units are selected.

Query Command: LMSUP?<ws><,><c>


Return String: LMSUP <c>,<limit_val>
Remarks: Return the current value for the upper limit line.

LMTYP (Set Limit Checking Type)

LMTYP? (Query Limit Checking Type)


Set Command: LMTYP<ws><c><,><type>
Details: <c> 1|2
<type> COMPLEX | SIMPLE
Remarks: Selects the type of limits to be applied to be applied to the
Pulsed/Modulated profile. Note that for CW measurement only
simple limit checking is available.
Query Command: LMTYP?<ws><c>
Return String: LMTYP <c><,><type>
Remarks: Returns the selected limit checking type.

13000-00163 5-65
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

LMXASTQ (Query All Complex Limits Stores State)


Query LMXASTQ
Command:
Return LMXASTQ
String: <store_category>,<store_1>,<state><store_category><store_n>,<state>
Details: <store_category> USER | PDEF
<store_n> USER: 30
PDEF: 20
<flag> FREE | USED

Where:
USER: user defined stores
PDEF: pre-defined stores
FREE: The store does not hold a limits specification
USED: The store holds a valid limits specification
Remarks: Returns the status of all complex limits stores.

LMXNAME (Set Complex Limits Store Name)

LMXNAME? (Query Complex Limits Store Name)


Set Command: LMXNAME<ws><store_num><,><name_str>
Details: <store_num> 1Æ 30
<name_str> ASCII string (16 characters max)
Remarks: Replaces the existing name string with a new name for the
complex limit specification at the target <store_num>.

Query Command: LMXNAME?<ws><store_num>


Return String: LMXNAME <store_num>,<name_str>
Remarks: Returns the name string for the specified store number. If the
target store does not hold a valid specification, the return string
will be: LMXNAME <store_num>, 0.

5-66 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

LMXPOF (Set Complex Limits Power Offset)

LMXPOF? (Query Complex Limits Power Offset)


Set Command: LMXPOF<ws><c><,><offset>
Details: <c> 1|2
<offset> - 999.99 Æ +999.99 E+06
Remarks: Sets the complex limits specification power offset. If the value
exceeds the <offset> range an execution error is returned.
Note: The value of <offset> is ‘unit-less’. The user must ensure that
the value of <offset> agrees with the intended measurement
units. The magnitude of <offset> will be accepted (providing it
is within the specified <offset> range), regardless of the
permitted range for the measurement units currently selected
on channel <c>.
Query Command: LMXPOF?<ws><c>
Return String: LMXPOF <c>,<offset>
Remarks: Returns the limit specification amplitude offset.

LMXREPN (Set Complex Limits Repeat Count)

LMXREPN? (Query Complex Limits Repeat Count)


Set Command: LMXREPN<ws><c><,><count>
Details: <c> 1|2
<count> 2 Æ 8
Remarks: Sets the number of times the limit specification is to be
replicated.

Query Command: LMXREPN?<ws><c>


Return String: LMXREPN <c>,<count>
Remarks: Returns the number of times the limit specification is
replicated.

13000-00163 5-67
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

LMXREPS (Set Complex Limits Repeat State)

LMXREPS? (Query Complex Limits Repeat State)


Set Command: LMXREPS<ws><c><,><state>
Details: <c> 1|2
<state> OFF | ON
Remarks: Enables the complex limits repeat feature. When enabled the
complex limit specification currently applied will be repeated
according to the selection for repeat count(LMXREPN), and
power/time replication offsets (LMXROFP,LMXROFT).

Query Command: LMXREPS?<ws><c>


Return String: LMXREPS <c>,<state>
Remarks: Returns the complex limits repeat state.

LMXROFP (Set Complex Limits Power Replication Offset)

LMXROFP? (Query Complex Limits Power Replication Offset)


Set Command: LMXROFP<ws><c><,><offset>
Details: <c> 1|2
<offset> – 999.99 Æ +999.99 E+06
Remarks: Sets the limits replication amplitude offset. If the value
exceeds the <offset> range an execution error is returned.
This command is used in conjunction with the LMXREPN
command to define the power offset to be applied to the
repeated limit mask.
The value of <offset> is unit-less and will be accepted
(providing it is within <offset> range), regardless of the
permitted range for the channel units currently selected.

Note: The user must ensure that the value of <offset> agrees with
the intended measurement units.
Query Command: LMXROFP?<ws><c>
Return String: LMXROFP <c>,<offset><suffix_mult><suffix_units>
Remarks: Returns the complex limits replication amplitude offset.

5-68 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

LMXROFT (Set Time Replication Offset)

LMXROFT? (Query Time Replication Offset)


Set Command: LMXROFT<ws><c><,><offset>
Details: <c> 1|2
<offset> -7.00 Æ +7.00 s
Remarks: Sets the complex limit specification time replication offset.
This command is used in conjunction with the LMXREPN
command to define the time offset applied to the repeated limit
mask.
Notes: The replicated mask will be offset with respect to the original
specification reference point ( i.e. segment 1 start time ).

Query Command: LMXROFT?<ws><c>


Return String: LMXROFT <c>,<offset><suffix_mult><suffix_units>
Remarks: Returns the limit specification time offset.

LMXSAVE (Save Specification to Complex Limits Store)


Set Command: LMXSAVE
Remarks: This command saves the complex limits specification being
currently edited to the target non-volatile store number. Issue
this command to complete the command sequence LMXSID,
LMXSEG, LMXSAVE required for defining a complex limits
specification having one or more segments.
Failing to issue this command will result in loss of data if a
subsequent LMXSID is sent, or the instrument is turned OFF.
An execution error will be returned if this command is issued
without first sending the LMXSID command, or if this
command is sent twice or more when saving a specification.

13000-00163 5-69
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

LMXSEG (Define Complex Limits Segment)


Set Command: LMXSEG<ws><seg_limits>
Details: <seg_limits> <start_time><,> <stop_time><,><up_lim_start>
<,><up_lim_stop><,><low_lim_start>
<,><low_lim_stop>
Note: <start_time> Segment start time
<stop_time> Segment stop time
<up_lim_start> Upper limit power start
<up_lim_stop> Upper limit power stop
<low_lim_start> Lower limit power start
<low_lim_stop> Lower limit power stop
The absolute maximum range for each of the above input
parameters are defined below. Note that all time-related
parameters are defined with respect to the trigger point ( t = 0 )
Time parameters -7.00 Æ +7.00 s
Power parameters -999.99 Æ +999.99 E+06
IMPORTANT: All parameters specified for <seg_limits> must be
entered in the order in which they are listed. Amplitude related
parameters are ‘unit-less’. The user must ensure that the
magnitude of these values agree with the intended measurement
units.
Remarks: Defines a single limit segment to be saved to the target complex
limits store. Repeat this command two or more times to define up
to a maximum of 24 segments. Contiguous segments must not
overlap in time, but gaps between segments are allowed. It is
possible to define only UPPER or only LOWER limits for any
segment within a specification by only sending the start/stop limit of
interest and leaving the other fields empty ( the separating commas
must be included, see examples below ).
While sending multiple segments, If any one segment causes an
execution error the user must re-send all data from the start again.
( GPIB will discard any valid segments previously sent and will NOT
accept any subsequent segments ). It is recommended to query
the GPIB status registers for any execution errors following each
LMXSEG command.
When an execution error is raised, the user MUST issue a new
LMXSID command to clear the editor and restart receiving
segments again. Ensure that the error within the segment is
rectified before re-sending the command sequence.
IMPORTANT:
Examples:

To define the UPPER limit only (assume sloping limit and dBm

5-70 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

units):
LMXSEG 20US, 28US, -30,-45, , ,
To define the LOWER limit only (assume flat limit and dBm units):
LMXSEG 20US,28US, , , -30,-30
Notes: Only send this command following the LMXSID command. Failing
to do so will result in an execution error. Also use the LMXSAVE
command at the end of the segment definition. Failing to do so will
result in loss of data if a subsequent LMXSID is sent, or the
instrument is turned OFF.

LMXSID (Set Complex Limits Specification ID Header)


Set Command: LMXSID<ws><store_num><,><name_str>
Details: <store_num> 1 Æ 30
<name_str> ASCII string (16 characters max)
Remarks: Defines the target store number and name string for the
complex limits specification. Note that this command must be
followed by one or more LMXSEG commands and always
terminated by the LMXSAVE command to save the
specification to the target non-volatile store.
Failing to use the LMXSAVE command will result in loss of
data if the user subsequently sends a new LMXSID command
or the instrument is turned OFF.
Notes: Sending LMXSID followed immediately by LMXSAVE is
accepted as a valid operation and will effectively erase an
existing store. Attempting to use such store number to a trace
(using the LMXSPEC command) will result in no limit checking
being applied as there are no segments defined.

13000-00163 5-71
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

LMXSPEC (Set Complex Limits Specification Number to Apply)

LMXSPEC? (Query Applied Complex Limit Specification)


Set Command: LMXSPEC<ws><c><,><spec_category><,><spec_number>
Details: <c> 1|2
<spec_category> USER | PDEF
<spec_number> see below
Note: The range of <spec_number> depends on the
specification category selected as follows:
USER: 1 Æ 30
PDEF 1 Æ 20
Remarks: When the limit checking state is ON and the selected limit type
is COMPLEX, the selected complex limits specification stored
at <spec_number> store will be applied to the P/M profile on
channel <c>.

Query Command: LMXSPEC? <ws><c>


Return String: LMXSPEC <c>,<spec_category>,<spec_number>
Remarks: Returns the complex limits specification number being applied
to the selected channel.

5-72 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

LMXSPEF (Define Full Complex Limits Specification)


Set LMXSPEF<ws><store_num><,><name_str><,><num_seg><,><seg_data>
Command:
Details: <store_num> 1 Æ 30
<name_str> ASCII string (16 characters max)
<num_seg> Total number of segments to be sent (1 Æ 24)
<seg_data> Must be sent in the sequence;
<seg_1><,><seg_2><,><seg_3><,> … <seg_N>
Where: <seg_N> is the total number of segments as defined in the
<num_seg> parameter or the maximum number of segments (24 max.).
Each segment <seg_N> must be defined as follows:
<start_time> Segment start time
<stop_time> Segment stop time
<up_lim_start> Upper limit power start
<up_lim_stop> Upper limit power stop
<low_lim_start> Lower limit power start
<low_lim_stop> Lower limit power stop
The absolute maximum range for the above input parameters is as follows:
Time parameters 0 Æ 7s (15.625 ns resolution)
Power parameters -999.99 Æ +999.99 E+06
NOTE: All time-related parameters are defined with respect to the trigger
point (t= 0)
Remarks: This command sends a complete complex limits specification to be saved
at the target store number. The specification must not contain more than 24
segments. Contiguous segments must not overlap in time, but gaps
between segments are allowed. If any of the specified parameters in any
segment does not comply with these rules, GPIB will reject the whole data
and raise an execution error.
It is possible to define only UPPER or only LOWER limits for any segment
within a specification by only sending the start/stop limit of interest and
leaving the other fields empty ( the separating commas must be included,
see examples below ).
Notes: DO NOT use LMXSAVE with this command.
Amplitude related parameters are unit-less. The user must ensure that the
magnitude of these values agree with the intended measurement units.
All parameters specified for <seg_N> must be entered in the order in which
they are listed.

13000-00163 5-73
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

Example: Defining a specification in dBm units, UPPER LIMIT only, having 2


segments at store 5 (assumed FREE).
Segment 1: Start_t = 20µs, Stop_t = 28µs, Up_lim_pow_start = –30,
Up_lim_pow_stop = -30
Segment 2: Start_t = 28µs, Stop_t = 38µs, Up_lim_pow_start = -1,
Up_lim_pow_stop = -1
LMXSPEF 5, GSM2SLOT_DBM, 2, 20US, 28US, -30, -30, , ,28US,
38US, -1, -1, , ,

5-74 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

LMXSPO (Output Complex Limits Specification)


Query LMXSPO<ws><store_category><,><store_num>
Command:
Details: <store_category> USER | PDEF
<store_num> USER: 1 Æ 30
PDEF: 1 Æ 20
Return LMXSPO <store_category>,<store_num>,<name_str>,<num_seg>,
String: <seg_data>
Details: <name_str> ASCII string (16 characters max)
<num_seg> Total number of segments to be sent (1 Æ 24)
<seg_data> (See below)
The format for <seg_data> is as follows:
<seg_1>,<seg_2>,…<seg_N>
Where: <seg_N> is the number of segments defined in the
specification (1 Æ 24). Each segment <seg_N> is returned in the
following format:
<start_time>,<stop_time>,<up_lim_start>,<up_lim_stop>,<low_lim_st
art>,<low_lim_stop>
<start_time> Segment start time
<stop_time> Segment stop time
<up_lim_start> Upper limit power start
<up_lim_stop> Upper limit power stop
<low_lim_start> Lower limit power start
<low_lim_stop> Lower limit power stop

Remarks: Returns the complex limit specification held at the target


<store_num> store in ASCII format. If the store does not hold a valid
specification, the return string is LMXSPO 0
Notes: If any segment within the specification was originally defined as
having only an UPPER or a LOWER limit, the instrument will
substitute the absolute maximum / minimum magnitude ratings for the
missing limits (i.e. – 999.99 for LOWER and +999.99 E+06 for
UPPER limit, see example below).
Example:

Returning a specification defined in the USER stores, dBm units,


UPPER LIMIT only, having 2 segments at store 5.
Segment 1: Start_t = 20µs, Stop_t = 28µs, Up_lim_pow_start = –30,

13000-00163 5-75
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

Up_lim_pow_stop = -30
Segment 2: Start_t = 28µs, Stop_t = 38µs, Up_lim_pow_start = -1,
Up_lim_pow_stop = -1
LMXSPO USER, 5, GSM2SLT_DBM, 2, 20US, 28US, -30, -30,
999.99E+06, 999.99E+06, 28US, 38US, -1, -1, – 999.99, – 999.99

LMXSTQ (Query Complex Limits Memory Store)


Query Command: LMXSTQ<ws><store_num>
Details: <store_number> 1 Æ 30
Return String: LMXSTQ <store_number>,<store_ status>
Details: <status_status> FREE | USED
FREE The store is empty.
USED The store holds a valid limits specification.
Remarks: This command allows querying the status of a selected user
complex limits store. Use this command to avoid over-writing
a store that may already hold a valid specification.

5-76 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

LMXTOF (Set Complex Limits Time Offset)

LMXTOF? (Query Complex Limits Time Offset)


Set Command: LMXTOF<ws><c><,><offset>
Details: <c> 1|2
<offset> – 7.00 s Æ +7.00 s
Remarks:: Sets the complex limit specification time offset. This command
allows for minor adjustments of the limit mask along the profile
x-axis. Note that the specification reference point is taken to
be segment 1 start time with respect to the trigger point ( t =
0 ). Sending a time <offset> will move the whole mask by the
defined amount from segment 1 reference point.
Query command: LMXTOF?<ws><c>
Return String: LMXTOF <c>,<offset>
Remarks: Returns the selected time offset for the complex limit
specification being applied.

13000-00163 5-77
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

Scaling
PMPAUTO (Autoscale Pulsed/Modulated Profile)
Set PMPAUTO<ws><c>
Command:
Details: <c> 1|2
Remarks: Single-shot autoscale function to scale the displayed Pulsed/Modulated
measurement profile to fill the measurement window.

PMPREF (Set Pulsed/Modulated Profile Reference Level)

PMPREF? (Query Pulsed/Modulated Profile Reference Level)

Set PMPREF<ws><c><,><unit_type><,><ref_level>[<suffix_mult>][<suffix_unit>]
Command:
Details: <c> 1|2
<unit_type> DB | W | % or PCT
<ref_level> see below for allowed ranges
[<suffix_mult>] Applies only to W units (N to G)
[<suffix_unit>] see CHUNIT for supported units

The <ref_level> parameter depends upon the units selected:


LOG units -998.99 to +999.99
Watts 100 GW to 100 NW
% or PCT 10,000 to 0.0001

Units Resolution:
LOG units 0.01 DB
Watts variable *
PCT variable *
* Numeric entries for this field are limited to a maximum of 5 digits
including 2 decimal point digits. The resolution, as a result, will vary
according to the magnitude of the selected reference level. (e.g. if
selecting a 4-digit integer value, the resolution will be to one decimal
point digit).

5-78 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

Note: If <suffix_mult> is not specified, the default units of Watts will be assumed.
Remarks: Sets the graph reference level for Pulsed/Modulated measurements.

Query PMPREF?<ws><c><,><unit_type>
Command:
Return PMPREF <c>,<unit_type>,<ref_level>
String:
Remarks: Returns the graph reference level for Pulsed/Modulated measurements.

PMPSCAL (Set Pulsed/Modulated Profile Scale)

PMPSCAL? (Query Pulsed/Modulated Profile Scale)


Set PMPSCAL<ws><c><,><unit_type><,><scale_value>[<suffix_mult>][<suffix_unit>]
Command:
Details: <c> 1|2
<unit_type> DB | W | % or PCT
<scale_value> See below for allowed resolution
[<suffix_mult>] Applies only to W units (N to G)
[<suffix_unit>] See CHUNIT for allowed units

The <scale_value> parameter varies depending upon the units selected:


LOG units 0.1 DB/div to 50 DB/div
Watts 10 GW/div to 10 NW/div
% or PCT 1000 units/div to 0.001 units/div
Note: If <suffix_mult> is not specified, the default units of Watts will be assumed.
Remarks: Sets the graticule scale for Pulsed/Modulated measurements.
Query PMPSCAL?<ws><c><,><unit_type>
Command:
Return PMPSCAL<c>,<unit_type>,<scale_value>
String:
Remarks: Returns Sets the graticule scale for Pulsed/Modulated measurements.

13000-00163 5-79
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

Min/Max
ML243xA command supported

CWMMRST (Reset Min and Max Tracking)


Set Command: CWMMRST<ws><c>
Details: <c> 1|2
Remarks: This command resets the min/max values for the CW
measurement mode if Min/Max tracking state is enabled (see
CWMMTKS).

ML243xA command supported

CWMMTKS (Set Min and Max Values Tracking State)

CWMMTKS? (Query Min and Max Values Tracking State)


Set Command: CWMMTKS<ws><c><,><state>
Details: <c> 1|2
<state> OFF | ON
Remarks: Turns the min/max tracking for the specified channel ON or
OFF.

Query Command: CWMMTKS?<ws><c>


Return String: CWMMTKS<c>,<state>
Remarks: Returns the min/max tracking state.

5-80 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

Profile Display
PMPDREP (Set Pulsed/Modulated Profile Data Representation
Type)

PMPDREP? (Query Pulsed/Modulated Profile Data Representation


Type)
Set Command: PMPDREP<ws><c><,><type>
Details: <c> 1|2
<type> NORM | MIN&MAX | MIN | MAX
NORM This is the default setting. The average for each
data point is drawn on the displayed profile.
MIN&MAX Displays the minimum (MIN) and maximum
(MAX) measured values for each data point on
the displayed profile. A vertical line linking the
MIN and MAX values is drawn for each data
point.
MIN: Displays only the MIN measurement values for
each point on the displayed profile.
MAX: Displays only the MAX measurement values for
each point on the displayed profile.
Remarks: Defines the measurement profile data representation for
Pulsed/Modulated profile mode. The displayed minimum and
maximum value for each data point is extracted from a ‘sample
window’ with the number of samples dependent upon the
system acquisition speed and the selected profile capture time.

Notes: When selecting MIN, MAX or MIN&MAX, the selected data


representation will take effect from the time this command is
received or following a Pulsed/Modulated profile reset
command (see PMPDRST command).
Query Command: PMPDREP? <ws><c>
Return String: PMPDREP <c>,<type>
Remarks: Returns the Pulsed/Modulated data hold representation type.

13000-00163 5-81
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

PMPTRK (Set Pulsed/Modulated Profile Min/Max Tracking Mode)

PMPTRK? (Query Pulsed/Modulated Profile Min/Max Tracking


Mode)
Set Command: PMPTRK<ws><c><,><mode>
Details: <c> 1|2
<mode> SINGLE | INFINITE
SINGLE: Resets min and max values after each sweep.
INFINITE: Never resets the MIN and MAX values.
Following every new measurement sweep,
each profile data point is only updated if the
new measurement is greater than the
displayed MAX value or smaller than the MIN
value.
Remarks: Sets the P/M profile min/max tracking mode. The tracking is
applied to the whole trace regardless of gating patterns setups
(i.e. tracking cannot be ‘localised’ within gates only).

Query Command: PMPTRK?<ws><c>


Return String: PMPTRK <c>,<mode>
Remarks: Returns the P/M profile min/max tracking mode selected.

5-82 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

Meas Hold
CHOLD (Set Display Channel Measurement Hold)

CHOLD? (Query Display Channel Measurement Hold)


Set Command: CHOLD<ws><c><,><state>
Details: <c> 1|2
<state> ON | OFF
Remarks: This command holds the displayed readings for the selected
channel on the instrument front panel.

Query Command: CHOLD?<ws><c>


Return String: CHOLD <c>,<state>
Remarks: Returns the state of the display channel hold setting.

13000-00163 5-83
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

Peaking Indicator
CHPIRST (Reset Channel Readout Peaking Indicator)
Set Command: CHPIRST<ws><c>
Details: <c> 1|2
Remarks: When this command is issued, the Peaking Indicator is reset to a
half its full-scale deflection.

CHPKS (Set Channel Readout Peak Indicator State)

CHPKS? (Query Channel Readout Peak Indicator State)


Set Command: CHPKS<ws><c><,><state>
Details: <c> 1|2
<state> OFF | ON
Remarks: This command controls the display of the Peaking Indicator on the
instrument front panel. This setting will only take effect when the
instrument is in Readout display mode. In Pulsed/Modulated
Readout mode, only the measurement Average is used. When
set to ON, the instrument will display a bar graph with a 10 dB full-
scale deflection.

Query Command: CHPKS?<ws><c>


Return String: CHPKS <c>,<state>
Remarks: Returns the state of the channel Peaking Indicator.

5-84 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

Post Processing
PPACQRT (Restart Post Processing Acquisition)
Set Command: PPACQRT<ws><c>
Details: <c> 1|2
Remarks: Restarts post-processing acquisition cycle. An execution error
is returned if post-processing is disabled on the selected
channel or Power Added Efficiency (PAE) is selected.

PPACQS (Set Post Processing Acquisition State)

PPACQS? (Query Post Processing Acquisition State)


Set Command: PPACQS<ws><c><,><state>
Details: <c> 1|2
<state> OFF | ON
Remarks: When this command sets <state> to ON the first time, the
selected post-processing module measurements acquisition
will start. Use the PPACQRT command to restart a new
acquisition cycle.

Query Command: PPACQS?<ws><,><c>


Return String: PPACQS<c>,<state>
Remarks: Return the state of post processing acquisition.

13000-00163 5-85
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

PPFUNC (Set Post-processing Function Module )

PPFUNC? (Query Post-processing Function Module)


Set Command: PPFUNC<ws><c><,><module>
Details: <c> 1|2
<module> STATS | PAE
STATS Statistical Analysis Module
PAE Power Added Efficiency
Remarks: Allows selection of a function module for post-processing on
the target channel. The PAE module requires two input
signals to calculate a PAE reading and hence is only available
on ML2488A dual channel units. An execution error is
returned if using this command to select PAE with single
channel units. PAE measurements can be made in both CW
and Pulsed/Modulated measurement modes. When using
Pulsed/Modulated mode, the user can additionally select the
measurement source for the PAE calculations (see PAESRC
command).
Query Command: PPFUNC?<ws><c>
Return String: PPFUNC <c>,<module>
Remarks: Return the selected post processing function module

5-86 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

Statistical Processing
TTFRO (Output Statistical Post-processing Function Readings)
Query Command: TTFRO<ws><c>
Return String: Channels 1 | 2
TTFRO <c>,<num_elements>,<ch_pct_1>, … <ch_pct_N>
Channels 1&2
TTFRO <c>,<num_elements>,<ch1_pct_1>, …
<ch1_pct_N>,<ch2_pct_1>, … <ch2_pct N>
<num_elements> The total number of data point readings
<ch_pct_N> Percentage reading
Remarks: Return a 400 point per channel data set for the selected
statistical function. When selecting channels 1&2, channel 1
readings will be output first, followed immediately by channel 2
as shown in the return string format above. When selecting
<c> to be 1&2, the <num_elements> value will be the total
number of readings for both channels.
Notes: The recommended practice for requesting measurement data
over GPIB is to use TR-type commands to ensure that up-to-
date readings are obtained, in particular after sending
configuration commands that affect the measured power (e.g.
sending the SNOFIX command to add an offset to the
measurements). If TR-type commands are not used, a ‘Wait
Delay’ should be introduced between the configuration
commands and the data acquisition command to ensure that
any changes to the instrument set-up have rippled through to
the measurement system.

13000-00163 5-87
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

TTFUNC (Set Statistical Post-processing Function Type)

TTFUNC? (Query Statistical Post-processing Function Type)


Set Command: TTFUNC<ws><c><,><function>
Details: <c> 1|2
<function> PDF | CDF | CCDF
Where:-
PDF Probability Density Function
CDF Cumulative Distribution Function
CCDF Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function
Remarks: Selects the statistical function type.

Query Command: TTFUNC?<ws><c>


Return String: TTFUNC <c>,<function>
Remarks: Returns the statistical function type selected.

TTMKPOS (Set Statistical Post-processing Marker Position)

TTMKPOS? (Query Statistical Post-processing Marker Position)


Set Command: TTMKPOS<ws><c><,><position>
Details: <c> 1|2
<position> -999.99 Æ +999.99 dB(m)
Remarks: Moves the cursor to a selected power along the x-axis. The
marker will be moved to the nearest sample class resolution
matching the input position entered by the user. An execution
error is returned if attempting to move the marker beyond the
selected power range.

Query Command: TTMKPOS?<ws><c>


Return String: TTMKPOS <c>,<position>
Remarks: Returns the current cursor position along the x-axis in dB(m).

5-88 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

TTMKRO (Output Marker reading)


Query Command: TTMKRO<ws><c>
Details: <c> 1 | 2 | 1&2
Return String: Channels 1 | 2
TTMKRO <c>,<tmk_pct>,<tmk_pow>
Channels 1&2
TTMKRO
<c>,<ch1_tmk_pct>,<ch1_tmk_pow>,<ch2_tmk_pct>,
<ch2_tmk_pow>
<tmk_pct> Percentage reading at cursor position
<tmk_pow> Power reading at cursor position
Remarks: Returns the Statistics cursor readings. The cursor percentage
reading at a specific power range (or power bucket) is the
number of readings falling in that bucket divided by the total
power range being measured (not only the graph displayed
power range). The cursor power is the reading from one of
400 data points on the Statistic displayed profile. The power
resolution for each data point is calculated from the start/stop
power range (see TTPST, TTPSP commands), divided by 400
data points.
When selecting channels 1&2, channel 1 readings will be
output first, followed immediately by channel 2 as shown in the
returned string format. If the marker is disabled, an execution
error is returned (see TTMKS command).
Notes: The recommended practice for requesting measurement data
over GPIB is to use TR-type commands to ensure that up-to-
date readings are obtained, in particular after sending
configuration commands that affect the measured power (e.g.
sending the SNOFIX command to add an offset to the
measurements). If TR-type commands are not used, a ‘Wait
Delay’ should be introduced between the configuration
commands and the data acquisition command to ensure that
any changes to the instrument set-up have rippled through to
the measurement system.

13000-00163 5-89
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

TTMKS (Set Statistical Post-processing Marker State)

TTMKS? (Query Statistical Post-processing Marker Position)


Set Command: TTMKS<ws><c><,><state>
Details: <c> 1|2
<state> OFF | ON
Remarks: Sets the cursor state for statistical post-processing functions.

Query Command: TTMKS?<ws><c>


Return String: TTMKS <c>,<state>
Remarks: Returns the statistical post-processing functions cursor state.

TTPSP (Set Statistical Post-processing Display Stop Power)

TTPSP? (Query Statistical Post-processing Display Stop Power)


Set Command: TTPSP<ws><c><,><power>
Details: <c> 1|2
<power> -999.99 Æ +999.99 dB(m)
Remarks: Sets the stop power for the display of statistical data.

Query Command: TTPSP?<ws><c>


Return String: TTPSP <c>,<power>
Remarks: Returns the stop power for the display of statistical data.

5-90 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

TTPST (Set Statistical Post-processing Display Start Power)

TTPST? (Query Statistical Post-processing Display Start Power)


Set Command: TTPST<ws><c><,><power>
Details: <c> 1|2
<power> -999.99 Æ +999.99 dB(m)
Remarks: Sets the start power for the display of statistical data.

Query Command: TTPST?<ws><c>


Return String: TTPST <c>,<power>
Remarks: Returns the start power for the display of statistical data.

TTSRC (Set Statistical Post-processing Source Selection)

TTSRC? (Query Statistical Post-processing Source Selection)


Set Command: TTSRC<ws><c><,><source>
Details: <c> 1|2
<source> CHANNEL | GATE | MARKER
Remarks: Selects the measurement source for statistical post-processing
data. Note that when selecting GATE or MARKER, the
currently ‘Active’ gate or marker will be used as the
measurement source. An execution error is returned if there
are no enabled gates or markers.
Query Command: TTSRC?<ws><c>
Return String: TTSRC <c>,<source>
Remarks: Returns the source selected for statistical post-processing.

TTZIN (Statistical Post-processing Function Zoom In)


Query Command: TTZIN<ws><c>
Remarks: When sending this command the instrument performs a zoom-
in centred on the cursor position.

13000-00163 5-91
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

TTZOUT (Statistical Post-processing Function Zoom Out)


Query Command: TTZOUT<ws><c>
Remarks: When sending this command the instrument performs a zoom-
out centred on the cursor position.

PAE Processing
PAEBI (Set PAE Bias Current Value)

PAEBI? (Query PAE Bias Current Value)


Set Command: PAEBI<ws><c><,><current>
Details: <c> 1|2
<current> 1.00 uA Æ 1.00 kA
Remarks: Selects the Bias Current value for PAE post-processing
measurements. When changing the Bias Current value using
this command, the appropriate instrument setting will be
modified. The new value however, will only be applied if the
configuration for Bias Current Source is FIXED (see PAEBIS
command).
Query Command: PAEBI?<ws><c>
Return String: PAEBI <c>,<current>
Remarks: Returns the value of the PAE Bias Current.

PAEBICF (Set PAE Bias Current Conversion Factor)

PAEBICF? (Query PAE Bias Current Conversion Factor)


Set Command: PAEBICF<ws><c><,><factor>
Details: <c> 1|2
<factor> 1.00 mV/A Æ 100.00 V/A
Remarks: Selects the Bias Current conversion factor value for PAE post-
processing measurements. This conversion factor will be
applied only when the Bias Current Source selected is PROBE
(see PAEBIS command).
Query Command: PAEBICF?<ws><c>
Return String: PAEBICF <c>,<factor>
Remarks: Returns the value of the PAE Bias Current Conversion Factor.

5-92 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

PAEBIS (Set PAE Bias Current Source)

PAEBIS? (Query PAE Bias Current Source)


Set Command: PAEBIS<ws><c><,><source>
Details: <c> 1|2
<source> FIXED | PROBE
Remarks: Configures the source from which the PAE Post-processing
module will extract the Bias Current. If the source is FIXED
the bias current is supplied directly using the command PAEBI.
If the source is PROBE, the bias current is calculated from a
voltage supplied at the rear panel V/GHZ input and a
conversion factor supplied with the command PAEBICF.
Query Command: PAEBIS?<ws><c>
Return String: PAEBIS <c>,<source>
Remarks: Returns the Bias Current source selected for PAE post-
processing.

PAEBV (Set PAE Bias Voltage Value)

PAEBV? (Query PAE Bias Voltage Value)


Set Command: PAEBV<ws><c><,><volts>
Details: <c> 1|2
<volts> 1.00 uV Æ 1.00 MV
Remarks: Selects the Bias Voltage value for PAE post-processing
measurements.
Query Command: PAEBV?<ws><c>
Return String: PAEBV <c>,<volts>
Remarks: Returns the value of the PAE Bias Voltage.

13000-00163 5-93
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

PAECFG(Set PAE Input Configuration)

PAECFG? (Query PAE Input Configuration)


Set Command: PAECFG<ws><c><,><config>
Details: <c> 1|2
<config> A-B | B-A
A-B Input A minus Input B
B-A Input B minus Input A
Remarks: Selects the Input Configuration for the PAE post-processing
module. The default value for the input configuration is A-B.
Query Command: PAECFG?<ws><c>
Return String: PAECFG <c>,< config >
Remarks: Returns the PAE Input Configuration for the queried channel.

PAEO (Output PAE Reading)


Set Command: PAEO<ws><c>
Details: <c> 1 | 2 | 1&2
Return String: Return String for channels 1 | 2:
PAEO <c>,<pae>
Return String for channels 1&2:
PAEO 1&2,<pae_ch1>,<pae_ch2>
<pae> Power Added Efficiency reading
Remarks: Returns the PAE reading or readings as a percentage (%) of
the difference between the output and input power, divided by
the bias power for the requested channel(s).

5-94 13000-00163
September 2005
Channel Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

PAESRC (Set PAE Source Selection)

PAESRC? (Query PAE Source Selection)


Set Command: PAESRC<ws><c><,><source>
Details: <c> 1|2
<source> CHANNEL | GATE | MARKER
Remarks: Selects the measurement source for Power Added Efficiency
(PAE) post-processing data. Note that when selecting GATE
or MARKER, the currently ‘Active’ gate or marker will be used
as the measurement source. An execution error will be
returned if there are no enabled gates or markers. Similarly,
an execution error is returned if selecting GATE or MARKERS
with a channel configured in CW mode.
Query Command: PAESRC?<ws><c>
Return String: PAESRC <c>,<source>
Remarks: Returns the source selected for statistical post-processing.

13000-00163 5-95
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Channel Commands

5-96 13000-00163
September 2005
Chapter 6. Sensor Commands

Function Command Page reference

Cal Factor Display Units - Set or Query SNCFU 6-8

Cal Factor Frequency Value – Set or Query SNCFRQ 6-6

Cal Factor Manual - Set or Query SNCFCAL 6-6


Cal Factor Source - Set or Query SNCFSRC 6-7

Cal Factor Table - Clear SNCTCLR 6-29


Cal Factor Table - Output in ASCII SNCTAO 6-25
Cal Factor Table - Output in Binary Format SNCTBO 6-28

Cal Factor Table - Preset SNCTPRE 6-30


Cal Factor Table – Query number SNCTNQ 6-30
Cal factor Table - Query Number In Use SNCFUSE 6-23
Cal Factor Table - Save SNCTSAV 6-30
Cal Factor Table Binary Load SNCTBIN 6-27

Cal Factor Table Direct ASCII - Write to Sensor SNCTAW 6-26

Cal Factor Table Entry SNCTADD 6-24


Cal Factor Table Identity Name – Set or Query SNCTID 6-29

Cal Factor Table Number - Set SNCTABN 6-23

Cal Factor Value - Query Current SNCFVAL 6-9


Calibration Factor Adjust - Set or Query SNCFADJ 6-5
Filter State - Set or Query SNFILTS 6-3

Information - Query SNTYPE 6-3


Offset - Output Table in ASCII SNOFTO 6-12

Offset Table - Clear SNOTCLR 6-20

Offset Table - Output in Binary Format SNOTBO 6-17


Offset Table – Set or Query SNOTSEL 6-21
Offset Table - Write SNOTBW 6-19
Offset Type - Set or Query SNOFTYP 6-13

Offset Value - Output SNOFVO 6-13


Offset Value - Set or Query Fixed SNOFIX 6-12

13000-00163 6-1
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Sensor Commands

Function Command Page reference

Range Hold - Set or Query SNRGH 6-32

Universal Sensor Operation Mode - Set SNUNIVM 6-4


V/GHz Calibration Factor Start Frequency - Set or SNZSTF 6-11
Query
V/GHz Calibration Factor Start Voltage - Set or SNZSTV 6-11
Query
V/GHz Calibration Factor Stop Frequency - Set or SNZSPF 6-10
Query
V/GHz Calibration Factor Stop Voltage - Set or SNZSPV 6-10
Query
Valid Cal Factor Table - Query SNCTVAL 6-31

6-2 13000-00163
September 2005
Sensor Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

Set Up
SNFILTS (Set Sensor Filter State)

SNFILTS? (Query Sensor Filter State)


Set Command: SNFILTS<ws><s><,><state>
Details: <s> A|B
<state> OFF | ON
Note: Sets the sensor filter state. This setting will take effect only
when a wideband sensor type MA2490A or MA2491A is
connected to the sensor input. The instrument will ignore this
setting if any other sensor type is connected.

Query Command: SNFILTS?<ws><s>


Return String: SNFILTS <s>,<state>
Remarks: Returns the selected sensor filter state.

ML243xA command supported

SNTYPE (Query Sensor Information)


Query Command: SNTYPE<ws><s>
Details: <s> A|B
Return String: <sensor_id>,<sensor serial>
Where:
<sensor_id> Sensor model identification code
<sensor serial> Sensor serial number
Remarks: This command returns an identification string for the sensor
connected to the selected input.
Example: SNTYPE A
Example Return String: MA2491A,008887
Notes: If no sensor is connected, the return string will be “NONE”

13000-00163 6-3
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Sensor Commands

ML243xA command supported

SNUNIVM (Set Universal Sensor Operation Mode)

SNUNIVM? (Query Universal Sensor Operating Mode)


Query Command: SNUNIVM<ws><s><,><mode
Details: <s> A|B
<mode> TRMS | FCW
TRMS True RMS mode
FCW Fast CW mode
Remarks: Selects between using a universal power sensor in normal
operating mode (TRMS) or Option 1 mode (FCW). FCW is
only selectable with universal power sensors with Option 1
fitted. An execution error is returned if attempting to select
FCW when Option 1 is not fitted.
Query command: SNUNIVM?<ws><s>
Return String: SNUNIVM <s>,<mode>
Remarks: Returns the universal power sensor current mode.

6-4 13000-00163
September 2005
Sensor Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

Cal Factor
ML243xA command supported

SNCFADJ (Set Sensor Calibration Factor Adjust)

SNCFADJ? (Query Sensor Calibration Factor Adjust)


Set Command: SNCFADJ<ws><s><,><units><,><val>
Details: <s> A or B
<units> % | PCT | DB
<val> 0.07 Æ 150.00 % | +31.55 Æ -1.76dB
Remarks: When the Cal Factor Source is set to MANUAL (see
SNCFSRC command), the instrument will use the cal factor
adjust value set with this command when performing a 0dBm
calibration.
If the sensor calibration factor source is set to V/GHz or
Frequency, the sensor internal EEPROM correction value at
50 MHz is used.
Note that the Cal Factor <val> can be entered in either percent
(%) or dB depending on the selected <units>.
Query Command: SNCFADJ?<ws><s>
Return String: SNCFADJ <s>,<units>,<val>
Remarks: Returns the calibration factor used for a 0dBm cal.

13000-00163 6-5
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Sensor Commands

ML243xA command supported

SNCFCAL (Set Calibration Factor Manual)

SNCFCAL? (Query Calibration Factor Manual)


Set Command: SNCFCAL<ws><s><,><units><,><val>
Details: <s> A or B
<units> % | PCT | DB
<val> 0.07 Æ 150.00 % | +31.55 Æ -1.76dB

Remarks: Sets the manual Cal Factor value. This value will be used
when the Cal Factor source is set to Manual.
Query Command: SNCFCAL?<ws><s>
Return String: SNCFCAL <s>,<units>,<val>
Remarks: Returns the Manual Cal Factor value.

ML243xA command supported

SNCFRQ (Set Calibration Factor Frequency Value)

SNCFRQ? (Query Calibration Factor Frequency Value)


Set Command: SNCFRQ<ws><s><,><value>[units]
Details: <s> A|B
<value> 100.00 kHz Æ 400.00 GHz
Remarks: Sets the frequency used to look up the correction data from
the sensor’s internal table.
Examples: Both of the following examples set the frequency for cal source
frequency to 25 GHz for sensor A.
SNCFRQ A,25E9
SNCFRQ A,25GHZ
Query Command: SNCFRQ?<ws><s>
Return String: SNCFRQ<s>,<calf_freq>
Remarks: Returns the Cal Factor frequency currently selected for the
specified sensor.

6-6 13000-00163
September 2005
Sensor Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

ML243xA command supported

SNCFSRC (Set Sensor Cal Factor Source)

SNCFSRC? (Query Sensor Cal Factor Source)


Set Command: SNCFSRC<ws><s><,><source>
Details: <s> A|B
<source> FREQ, MAN, VGHZ
FREQ (Frequency) Uses the internal EEPROM calibration
factor value in the sensor, from the
frequency set by the SNCFRQ command.
Selected frequencies falling between Cal
Factor data points are interpolated linearly
to 0.01 dB resolution.
MAN (Manual) Uses the manual Cal Factor set using the
command SNCFCAL.
VGHZ ( V/GHz ) Obtains the frequency from the V/GHz input
and looks up the calibration factor table
from the selected sensor internal EEPROM.
Remarks: Sets the source of the calibration factor.

Query Command: SNCFSRC?<ws><s>


Return String: SNCFSRC<ws><s><,><source>
Remarks: Returns the cal factor source.

13000-00163 6-7
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Sensor Commands

ML243xA command supported

SNCFU (Set Sensor Cal Factor Display Units)

SNCFU? (Query Sensor Cal Factor Display Units)


Set Command: SNCFU<ws><units>
Details: <s> A |B
<units> % (PCT) | dB
Remarks: This command changes the cal factor units displayed on the
front panel. Note that this setting will also change the <units>
for any Cal factor data requested over GPIB.
Query Command: SNCFU? <s>
Return String: SNCFU <s>,<units>
Remarks: Returns the sensor cal factor display units.

6-8 13000-00163
September 2005
Sensor Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

ML243xA command supported

SNCFVAL (Query Current Cal Factor Value)


Query Command: SCFVAL<ws><s>
Details: <s> A|B
Return String: SCFVAL<s>,<cf_val>
Details: <cf_val> 0.07 Æ 150.00 % | +31.55 Æ -1.76dB
Remarks: Returns the cal factor value currently being used for the
specified sensor. This will be a fixed value only when in
MANUAL cal factor mode, otherwise the value will depend on
the frequency entered when cal source is FREQUENCY and
the scaled frequency when the cal source is V/GHz.
SNCFVAL will not return the updated Cal Factor Value if the
system is in TR0 Trigger Hold mode. That is, if you change
the Cal Factor Frequency and want to read back what the unit
has set the Cal Factor to when the system is in TR0 mode, the
system will return the last Cal Factor value before you went
into TR0 mode.
There may be a delay of approximately 0.25 seconds after
changing the Cal Factor Frequency to read back the Cal
Factor Value, even when not in TR0. This is as SNCFVAL is
not updated instantly after changing the Cal Factor Frequency.
This restriction only applies to the SNCFVAL GPIB command
and does not effect any measurement taken. If you are in TR0
mode, change the Cal Factor Frequency and then take a
measurement; the Cal factor will be calculated correctly.

13000-00163 6-9
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Sensor Commands

ML243xA command supported

SNZSPF (Set V/GHz Calibration Factor Stop Frequency)

SNZSPF? (Query V/GHz Calibration Factor Stop Frequency)


Set Command: SNZSPF<ws><s><,><freq>[units]
Details: <s> A|B
<freq> 100.00 kHz Æ 400.00 GHz
Remarks: Sets the stop frequency of the V/GHz calibration factor
settings.

Query Command: SNZSPF?<ws><s>


Return String: SNZSPF <s>,<freq>
Remarks: Returns V/GHz calibration factor stop frequency.

ML243xA command supported

SNZSPV (Set V/GHz Calibration Factor Stop Voltage)

SNZSPV? (Query V/GHz Calibration Factor Stop Voltage)


Set Command: SNZSPV<ws><s><,><volt>[units]
Details: <s> A|B
<volt> 0.00 Æ 20.00 V

Remarks: Sets the stop voltage of the V/GHz calibration factor settings.

Query Command: SNZSPV?<ws><s>


Return String: SNZSPV <s>,<volt>
Remarks: Returns V/GHz calibration factor stop voltage.

6-10 13000-00163
September 2005
Sensor Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

ML243xA command supported

SNZSTF (Set V/GHz Calibration Factor Start Frequency)

SNZSTF? (Query V/GHz Calibration Factor Start Frequency)


Set Command: SNZSTF<ws><s><,><freq>[units]
Details: <s> A or B
<freq> 100.00 kHz Æ 400.00 GHz

Remarks: Sets the start frequency of the V/GHz calibration factor


settings.

Query Command: SNZSTF?<ws><s>


Return String: SNZSTF <s>,<freq>
Remarks: Returns V/GHz calibration factor start frequency.

ML243xA command supported

SNZSTV (Set V/GHz Calibration Factor Start Voltage)

SNZSTV? (Query V/GHz Calibration Factor Start Voltage)


Set Command: SNZSTV<ws><s><,><volt>[units]
Details: <s> A|B
<volt> 0.00 Æ 20.00 V
Remarks: Sets the start voltage of the V/GHz calibration factor settings.

Query Command: SNZSTV?<ws><s>


Return String: SNZSTV <s>,<volt>
Remarks: Returns V/GHz calibration factor start voltage.

13000-00163 6-11
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Sensor Commands

Offset
ML243xA command supported

SNOFIX (Set Fixed Offset Value)

SNOFIX? (Query Fixed Offset Value)


Set Command: SNOFIX<ws><s><,><fix_offset>[units]
Details: <s> A|B
<fix_offset> -200.00 Æ +200.00
<units> dB
Remarks: This command defines a fixed offset to be applied to the
selected sensor. When the selected sensor offset type is
‘FIXED’ (see SNOFTYP command), <fixed_offset> will be
added to the sensor measurement readings.
Query Command: SNOFIX?<ws><s>
Return String: SNOFIX <s>,<fix_offset>
Remarks: Returns the fixed offset value added to the sensor readings.

6-12 13000-00163
September 2005
Sensor Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

ML243xA command supported

SNOFTYP (Set Sensor Offset Type)

SNOFTYP? (Query Sensor Offset Type)


Set Command: SNOFTYP<ws><s><,><type>
Details: <s> A|B
<offset_type> OFF | FIXED | TABLE

OFF: No offset to be used


FIXED: Use the fixed value (SNOFIX) specified
TABLE: Use the Offset table (SNOTSEL) specified.
Remarks: This command is used to select the type of offset to apply to
the sensor.

Query Command: SNOFTYP?<ws><s>


Return String: SNOFTYP <s><,><offset_type>
Remarks: Returns the correct setting for the offset type.

ML243xA command supported

SNOFVO (Output Sensor Offset Value)


Query Command: SNOFVO<ws><s>
Details: <s> A|B
Return String: SNOFVO <s>, <offset_val>
Remarks: Returns the offset value being applied to the specified sensor if
the offset feature is enabled (see SNOFTYP). When an offset
table is selected (see SNOFTYP,SNOTSEL commands), the
offset will be extracted from the table entry whose frequency
matches the cal factor frequency entry (see SNCFRQ
command). If there is no frequency match, than the offset
applied is a linearly interpolated value calculated from the
adjacent frequency values in the offset table.

13000-00163 6-13
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Sensor Commands

SNOTAO (Output Sensor Offset Table in ASCII)


Query SNOTAO<ws><table_num>
Command:
Details: SNOTAO SNOTAO
<table_num>,<id_string>,<num_entry_pairs>,<freq_1>,<offset_1>,
<freq_N>,<offset_N>
<table_num> 1Æ5
<id_string> Table Identification string (9 characters
maximum)
<num_entry_pairs> 200 entries maximum
<freq_N> Frequency as a floating point value
<offset_N> Offset (dB only) as a floating-point value.

Remarks: Returns the selected offset <table_num> data in ASCII format. If


<table_num> exceeds the maximum number of tables, or the
selected table is not initialised, the Execution Error (EXE) bit in the
Event Status Register (ESR) will be set.

6-14 13000-00163
September 2005
Sensor Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

SNOTAW (Sensor Offset Table ASCII Write)


Query SNOTAW
Command:
Details: <ws><table_num><,><id_string><,><num_entry_pairs><,><ascii_data>
<table_num> 1Æ5
<id_string> Table Identification string (9 characters maximum)
<num_entry_pairs> 200 entries maximum
<ascii_data> <freq_1>[<suffix_mult><suffix_unit>], <offset_1>

<freq_N>[<suffix_mult><suffix_unit>], <offset_N>
Where: N is the number of entries. The range for <freq_N> and
<offset_N> is as follows:
<freq_N> 100.00 kHz Æ 400.00 GHz
<offset_N> -200.00 dB Æ +200.00 dB
Remarks: Loads user-defined frequency/offset data pairs in ASCII format into the
selected instrument’s offset table store. Note that this command will
overwrite any offset table data previously saved at <table_num>. To
avoid inadvertently erasing an existing offset table, use the command
SNOTVLD to check if the store is in use.
If <table_num> exceeds the maximum number of tables, or any of the
frequency/offset pairs exceeds the specified range, the whole data
string will be rejected and the Execution Error (EXE) bit in the Event
Status Register (ESR) will be set.

13000-00163 6-15
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Sensor Commands

SNOTADD (Add Offset Table Entry)


Query SNOTADD<ws><table_num><,><freq>[<suffix_mult><suffix_unit>]<,><offset>
Command:
Details: <table_num> 1Æ5
<freq> 100.00 kHz Æ 400.00 GHz
<offset> -200.00 dB Æ +200.00 dB
Remarks: This command adds a frequency/offset data pair to the selected offset table
store number. Offset table data pairs are added until the maximum number of
data entries is reached (200 maximum). Each valid entry is added to the
appropriate index in the table in ascending frequency order (starting from the
lowest index to the highest).
The Execution Error (EXE) bit in the Event Status Register (ESR) will be set
on the following conditions:
- The <table_num> exceeds the maximum number of tables
- The frequency or offset value exceeds the specified range
- The table is full

6-16 13000-00163
September 2005
Sensor Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

ML243xA command supported

SNOTBO (Output Offset Table in Binary Format)


Query Command: SNTOBO<ws><table_num>
Details: <table_num> 1Æ5
Return String: SNOTBO #<length><num_bytes>,<bin_data_block>
Details: <length> The number of characters in the
<num_bytes> field
<num_bytes> The number of bytes in <bin_data_block>,
following the comma (,).
<bin_data_block> <id_string><num_entries>
<offset_tbl_entries>

<id_string> 10 bytes (9 for the identity, plus a NULL


terminator byte)
<num_entries> 2 bytes representing the number of table
entry pairs
<offset_tbl_entries> <element1> … <elementN>
Where:
<elementN> 8-byte frequency / power-offset values
Remarks: Returns the selected offset table frequency/power-offset data in
binary format. Use this command as a convenient way to obtain
and store offset tables in compact format for later reloading using
the command SNOTBW. If wishing to decode the binary data
string, the example below shows how raw data bytes are
assembled into offset table elements. See also commands
SNOTAO, SNOTAW for manipulating offset tables in ASCII
format.
Example:
Sending the command: SNOTBO 1
Will return the string:
SNOTBO#41600,<id1>…<id10><cnt1><cnt2><data1>…<dataN>
Where:
4 The number of characters to read next to
determine how many bytes (after the comma
separator) are available in the output buffer
1600 The size in bytes of the offset table.
<id1>…<id10> A 10-byte identity string. If no string is defined,
the value of each byte is ‘0’
<cnt1><cnt2> Two bytes whose combined value is a 16-bit
integer containing the number of

13000-00163 6-17
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Sensor Commands

frequency/entry pairs that follow in the data


fields.
<dataN> is a single data byte, where N = 1600 in this
example
Note that each <elementN> is made up of 8 data bytes, therefore
1600 bytes make up 200 consecutive elements ( with no comma
separator ). The leftmost four bytes of <elemenN> represent the
frequency value and the rightmost four bytes represent the offset
value in dB for that frequency.
For example, the elements:
<data_element1>…<data_elementN>

Would consist of individual data bytes as follows:


<F1 F1 F1 F1 B1 B1 B1 B1>…<FN FN FN FN BN BN BN BN>
Where: ‘FN’ represents the frequency value as a 4-byte single
precision floating point number, and ‘BN’ represents the offset
value in dB as a 4-byte single precision floating point number.

6-18 13000-00163
September 2005
Sensor Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

ML243xA command supported

SNOTBW (Write Offset Table)


Set Command: SNOTBW<ws>< table_num ><,>< num_bytes
><,><binary_data>
Details: <table_num> 1Æ5
<num_bytes> number of bytes in the <binary_data>
string
<bin_data_block> <id_string><num_entries>
<offset_tbl_entries>
<id_string> 10 bytes (9 for the identity, plus a NULL
terminator byte)
<num_entries> 2 bytes representing the number of
table entry pairs
<offset_tbl_entries> <element1> … <elementN>

Where:
<elementN> 8-byte frequency / power-offset values
Remarks: This command writes data to the offset table specified by
<table_num>. The <num_bytes> field defines the total number
of bytes in <bin_data_block>. The contents of
<bin_data_block> are binary data obtained using the SNOTBO
command. Use this command as a convenient way to
download existing offset table from an instrument to quickly
program offset tables into other instruments. Refer to the
SNOTAW command using ASCII-formatted data, if wishing to
easily define and write new offset tables to the instrument.
Note: Note that sending this command will overwrite any offset table
data previously saved to <table_num>. To avoid inadvertently
erasing an existing offset table use the SNOTVLD command
first, to check if the store is already in use.
If <table_num> exceeds the maximum number of tables the
Execution Error (EXE) bit in the Event Status Register (ESR)
will be set.
When programming instruments with newly defined offset
tables, the recommended practice is to use the ASCII-based
SNOTAW command. Using this command instead involves
additional complexity in generating the correct floating-point
data that the instrument will understand.

13000-00163 6-19
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Sensor Commands

ML243xA command supported

SNOTCLR (Clear Offset Table)


Set Command: SNOTCLR<ws><table_num>
Details: <table_num> 1Æ5
Remarks: Sets all the values in the specified table to 0 dB and 0.00 Hz

SNOTID (Set Offset Table Identity Name)

SNOTID? (Query Offset Table Identity Name)


Set Command: SNOTID<ws><table_num><,><id_string>
Details: <table_num> 1Æ5
<id_string> 9 characters maximum or until a message
terminator is read as the end of the
identity string
Remarks: This command sets or updates the offset table store identity
string.
Query Command: SNOTID?<ws><table_num>
Return String: SNOTID <table_num>,<id_string>
Remarks: Returns the selected offset table ID string.

6-20 13000-00163
September 2005
Sensor Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

ML243xA command supported

SNOTSEL (Select Offset Table to Apply to Sensor)

SNOTSEL? (Query Offset Table Applied to Sensor)


Set Command: SNOTSEL<ws><s><,><table_num>
Details: <s> A|B
<table_num> 1Æ5
Remarks: This command applies the offset table specified by
<table_num>. Use this command when the offset type is set
to TABLE (see SNOFTYP command). The offset tables are a
set of frequency vs. dB offset value pairs. The offset value
that the instrument selects from the table depends on the Cal
Factor Source setting (see SNCFSRC command).
If the source is FREQUENCY, the entered frequency is used
to calculate the offset from the table. If the frequency
correction source is V/GHz, the frequency value calculated
from the supplied ramp input is used to calculate the offset
from the table. If the frequency does not match any frequency
in the table, interpolation is used to calculate the correct offset.
Note: If the frequency is greater than the maximum frequency in the
table, the offset value from the maximum table frequency is
used. If the frequency is less than the minimum frequency in
the table, the offset from the minimum table frequency is used.
The frequency comparisons start from the beginning of the
table; if the entry is 0 Hz, this is counted as the end of the
table.

Query Command: SNOTSEL?<ws><s>


Return String: SNOTSEL <s>,<table_num>
Remarks: Returns the offset table number being used.

13000-00163 6-21
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Sensor Commands

SNOTVLD (Query Valid Offset Table)


Query Command: SNOTVLD<ws><table_num>
Return String: <table_num> 1Æ5

Return String: FALSE | TRUE


Where:
FALSE Offset table queried is invalid or empty
TRUE Offset table queried is valid
Remarks: Queries the instrument on whether the selected offset table
<table_num> is a valid initialised table.

6-22 13000-00163
September 2005
Sensor Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

Edit CF Table
ML243xA command supported

SNCFUSE (Query Cal factor Table Number In Use)


Query Command: SNCFUSE<ws><s>
Details: <s> A|B
Return String: SNCFUSE <s>,<table_num>
Details: <table_num> 0 = factory default table.
1 Æ 10 = user table being used.
11 Æ 20 = factory table + user table being
used.
Remarks: Returns a number indicating the cal factor table, or
combination of tables being used by the selected sensor.

ML243xA command supported

SNCTABN (Set Cal Factor Table Number)


Set Command: SNCTABN<ws><s><,><table_number>
Details: <s> A|B
<table_number> Table number or combination to use
0 Factory default table
1 Æ10 User table being used
11Æ20 Factory table + User table being
used.
Remarks: Selects the cal factor table or combination of tables to be used
and automatically updates the sensor. This command only
executes when cal factor source is set to Frequency or V/GHz.
An execution error is returned if set to Manual or if the selected
table store is empty.

13000-00163 6-23
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Sensor Commands

ML243xA command supported

SNCTADD (Set Cal Factor Table Entry)


Set Command: SNCTADD<ws><s><,><table number><,><frequency
value>[units]<,><cal factor><,><cal factor units>
Details: <s> A|B
<table number> 1 Æ number of tables supported by
the sensor type
<frequency value> 100.00 kHz Æ 400.00 GHz
<cal factor> 0.07 Æ 150% or
+31.55 Æ –1.76 dB
<cal factor units> % | PCT | DB
Remarks: This command adds a cal factor/frequency data pair to the
selected cal factor table. The edited cal factor table will not be
used by the instrument until it is saved to the sensor memory
using the SNCSAV command (this is because the instrument
will only edit a copy of the selected cal factor table). Note that
if the sensor is removed from the input connector or power is
lost before the cal factor table being edited is saved to the
sensor memory, all changes will be lost.
Note: The user must ensure that the maximum number of cal factor
data pairs entered into a table is not exceeded. Sensors with a
maximum frequency of up to 40 GHz will hold 90 pairs, while
sensors with a maximum frequency of 50 GHz will hold 110
pairs.

6-24 13000-00163
September 2005
Sensor Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

SNCTAO (Output Sensor Cal Factor Table in ASCII


Query Command: SNCTAO<ws><s><,><table_number>
Details: <s> A|B
<table_number> 0|F Factory default table
1ÆN User tables
Where: N is the number of tables supported by the sensor type
(sensor dependent).
Return String: SNCTAO <s>,<table
number>,<id_string>,<num_entry_pairs>,<ascii_data>
<id_string> Identification string (7 characters
maximum)
<num_entry_pairs> 90-pair entries maximum for
sensors up to 40 GHz. 110-pair
entries maximum for sensors up to
50 GHz
<ascii_data> <freq_val_1>,<cal_factor_1> …
<freq_val_N>,<cal_factor_N>
Where: <freq_val_N>,<cal_factor_N> is the number of
frequency/cal factor entries in the table.
<freq_val_N> Frequency as a floating point value
<cal_factor_N> Cal Factor (in dB only) as a floating point
value.
Remarks: Returns the specified Cal Factor <table_number> for the
specified sensor in ASCII format. If <table_number> exceeds
the maximum number of tables held in the sensor, or the
selected table is not initialised, the Execution Error (EXE) bit in
the Event Status Register (ESR) will be set.

13000-00163 6-25
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Sensor Commands

SNCTAW (Cal Factor Table Direct ASCII Write to Sensor)


Set Command: SNCTAW<ws><s><,><table_number><,><id_string><,>
<num_entry_pairs><,><ascii_data>
Details: <s> A|B
<table number> 1 to N, where N is the number of
tables supported by the sensor
<id_string> Identification name string (7
characters maximum)
<num_entry_pairs> 90-pair maximum entries for sensor up
to 40 GHz. 110-pair maximum entries
for sensors up to 50 GHz
<ascii_data><freq_val>[<suffix_mult><suffix_unit>],<cal_factor>
[<suffix_mult> <suffix_unit>]
Where:
<freq_val> 100.00 kHz Æ 122.00 GHz
<cal_factor> -1.76 Æ +31.55 dB
Remarks: Loads the frequency / Cal factor pairs defined in <ascii_data> to
the target <table_number>. This command will automatically
save data to the sensor. The Execution Error (EXE) bit in the
Event Status Register (ESR) will be set if the <num_entry_pairs>
exceeds the maximum number of tables allowed.

6-26 13000-00163
September 2005
Sensor Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

ML243xA command supported

SNCTBIN (Cal Factor Table Binary Load)


Set Command: SNCTBIN<ws><s><,><table number><,><length><,><binary
data>
Details: <s> A|B
<table number> 1 Æ N, where: N is the number of tables
supported by the sensor type
<length> Length of message in bytes
<binary data> data in binary format as retrieved using
the SNCTBO command
Remarks: Loads a Cal factor table in binary format to the target
<table_number> in the specified sensor. The <length> field
defines the total number of bytes in <binary_data>. The
contents of <binary_data> are binary data bytes obtained
using the SNCTBO command. This command will
automatically save data to the target sensor. Processing will
take approximately 5 seconds.
Use this command as a convenient way to download existing
Cal factor tables from an instrument to quickly program Cal
factor tables into other sensors. Refer to the SNCTAW
command using ASCII-formatted data instead, if wishing to
easily define and write new Cal factor tables to one or more
sensors.
Note that sending this command will overwrite any Cal factor
data previously saved to <table_num>. To avoid inadvertently
erasing an existing table use the SNCTVAL command first, to
check if the store is already in use.
If <table_num> exceeds the maximum number of tables the
Execution Error (EXE) bit in the Event Status Register (ESR)
will be set.
When programming instruments with newly defined Cal factor
tables, the recommended practice is to use the ASCII-based
SNCTAW command. Using this command instead involves
additional data manipulation to convert data to a format
suitable for the instrument.

13000-00163 6-27
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Sensor Commands

ML243xA command supported

SNCTBO (Output Cal Factor Table in Binary Format)


Set Command: SNCTBO<ws><s><,><table number>
Details: <s> A|B
<table_number> 0|F for Factory default table
1ÆN for User tables
where: N is the number of tables
supported by the sensor type.
Remarks: This command outputs in binary format the cal factor table
stored at <table_number>. Each frequency/cal factor pair is
held in a 6-byte block. The frequency is encoded as a 4-byte
LONG INTEGER value with a 32768e-06 conversion factor.
The cal factor is encoded as a 2-byte INTEGER value with a
1024 conversion factor. To convert frequency/cal factor pairs
into Real numbers carry out the following steps:
1. Read the first 4 bytes into a 32-bit LONG Integer
variable (long int in C)
2. Cast the LONG variable to a 32-bit FLOATing point
variable (float in C)
3. Divide the FLOAT variable by 32768e-06 to find the
frequency as a floating point number
4. Read the last 2 bytes into the least significant bytes of a
LONG Integer variable
5. Cast the LONG variable to a FLOAT
6. Divide the FLOAT variable by 1024 to obtain the Cal
Factor as a floating point number
Use this command as a convenient way to quickly store Cal
factor tables for later loading into one or more sensors or
simply as a data backup. Refer to the command SNCTBIN for
writing Cal factor tables to a sensor. For reading or writing
ASCII-formatted Cal factor tables refer to the SNCTAO and
SNCTAW commands.
Return String: SNCTBO<ws><bin_data_len><,><bin_data_block>
Details: <bin_data_len> Total length in bytes of
<bin_data_block> (following the
comma separator)
<bin_data_block> <id_string><num_entries>
<cal_factor_entries>
<id_string> 8 bytes (7 for the identity, plus a NULL
terminator byte)
<num_entries> 2 bytes representing the number of
table pair entries
<cal_factor_entries> The frequency/cal factor pair data in
binary format.

6-28 13000-00163
September 2005
Sensor Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

ML243xA command supported

SNCTCLR (Clear Cal Factor Table)


Set Command: SNCTCLR<ws><s><,><table number>
Details: <s> A|B
<table number> 1 Æ N, where N is the number of tables
supported by the sensor.
Remarks: Clears the cal factor table to one entry for 50 MHz at 100%
and the identity name string from the table. The cleared table
is automatically saved to the sensor.

ML243xA command supported

SNCTID (Update Cal Factor Table Identity Name)

SNCTID? (Query Cal Factor Table Identity Name)


Set Command: SNCTID<ws><s><,><table number><,><id_string>
Details: <s> A|B
<table number> 1 Æ N, where: N is the number of tables
supported by the sensor
<id_string> Seven characters or until a message
terminator is read as the identity.
Remarks: Updates the seven-character identity string. This only affects
the copy of the cal factor table stored in the memory of the
power meter. To take effect and not be lost, the table must be
saved to the sensor using the SNCTSAV command.

Query Command: SNCTID?<ws><s><,><table number>


Return String: SNCTID <s>,<table number>,<id_string>
Remarks: Returns the selected Cal Factor table ID string for the selected
sensor.

13000-00163 6-29
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Sensor Commands

ML243xA command supported

SNCTNQ (Query Number of Cal Factor Tables in the Sensor)


Set Command: SNCTNQ <s>
Details: <s> A|B
Remarks: Returns the number of cal factor tables available in the
selected sensor.

ML243xA command supported

SNCTPRE (Preset Cal Factor Table)


Set Command: SNCTPRE<ws><s><,><table number>
Details: <s> A|B
<table number> 1 Æ N, where: N is the number of tables
supported by the sensor type.
Remarks: Presets the cal factor table to the factory settings. The preset
table is automatically saved to the sensor.
Notes: Universal power sensors with Option 1 fitted hold 2 sets of
User Cal Factor tables: one set for True RMS and one for Fast
CW sensor modes. When sending this command, the
instrument will only preset the user table associated to the
currently selected sensor mode (see SNUNIVM command).

ML243xA command supported

SNCTSAV (Cal Factor Table Save)


Set Command: SNCTSAV
Remarks: This command saves the cal factor table currently being edited
to the appropriate sensor. Processing may take a few
seconds.
Note: It is the user responsibility to issue a SNCTSAV command
when finished editing a cal factor table. The changes just
made will NOT be automatically saved if selecting a new table
for editing.

6-30 13000-00163
September 2005
Sensor Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

ML243xA command supported

SNCTVAL (Query Valid Cal Factor Table)


Set Command: SNCTVAL<ws><s><,><table number>
Details: <s> A|B
<table number> 1 Æ N, where: N is the number of tables
supported by the sensor type
Return string: SNCTVAL <s>,<table number>,<flag>
Details: <flag> FALSE | TRUE
Where:
FALSE Table queried non-valid
TRUE Table queried valid
Remarks: Queries the instrument on whether the table number passed is
a valid initialised table for the selected sensor.

13000-00163 6-31
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Sensor Commands

Range Hold
ML243xA command supported

SNRGH (Set Sensor Range Hold)

SNRGH? (Query Sensor Range Hold)


Set Command: SNRGH<ws><s>[,<range>]
Details: <s> A|B
<range> AUTO | 1 Æ 9
Different <range> numbers are allocated depending on the
Measurement Mode as follows:
Pulsed/Modulated
AUTO | 7 Æ 9
CW
AUTO | 1 Æ 5 (1 Æ 6 Universal Power Sensor Only in True
RMS mode)
AUTO Selects the suitable <range> depending on the
incoming signal level and measurement mode (see
above)
Remarks: This function can be used to affect the range hold setting as
follows:
1. To toggle between holding the current operating range
and AUTO issue the command with the <s>
parameter only e.g. SNRGH<ws><s>
2. To select or change the range hold value, use
SNRGH<ws><s><,><range>

Query Command: SNRGH?<ws><s>


Return String: SNRGH <s>,<range>
Remarks: Returns the current sensor range being held. Note that
<range> number will depend on the selected measurement
mode (see above).

6-32 13000-00163
September 2005
Chapter 7. Calibration and Zero Commands
Function Command Page reference

BNC Input Connector - Zero BNVZERO 7-2


Calibrate Sensor to 0 dBm Reference Source SNCAL 7-2

Reference Calibrator Frequency - Set or SNCALF 7-3


Query
RF Reference Calibrator State - Set or Query SNRFCAL 7-3

Sensor - Zero SNZERO 7-4

13000-00163 7-1
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Calibration and Zero Commands

ML243xA command supported

BNVZERO (Zero the BNC Input Connector)


Set Command: BNVZERO
Remarks: Zeros the multipurpose BNC connector used for Volts per GHz
connection (Analogue Input 2). This will calibrate the units to
read zero volts on this BNC.
Notes: During this operation the BNC connector must be connected to
0V DC for the zeroing sequence to be successful. Carry out
one of following actions to ensure the BNC input is connected
to 0V DC:
a) Disconnect any appliance from the BNC input connector.
b) Connect the BNC input connector to a 0V DC source

ML243xA command supported

SNCAL (Calibrate Sensor to 0 dBm Reference Source)


Set Command: SNCAL <ws><s>
Details: <s> A|B
Remarks: Performs a 0dBm calibration at the selected calibrator
frequency when a sensor is attached to the reference 0dBm
source on the ML248xA / ML249xA (or another 0dBm
reference source). Use the command SNCALF to select the
RF frequency source. If the calibration fails, the Execution
Error (EXE) bit in the Event Status Register is set.

7-2 13000-00163
September 2005
Calibration and Zero Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

SNCALF (Set Reference Calibrator Frequency)

SNCALF? (Query Reference Calibrator Frequency)


Set Command: SNCALF<ws>< cal_frq >
Details: <cal_frq> 50MHZ | 1GHZ
Remarks: Selects the RF source frequency for the reference calibrator.
Notes: The 1 GHz calibrator is optional. If selecting 1GHZ when the
calibrator is not fitted, an execution error is returned.
Query Command: SNCALF?
Return String: SNCALF <cal_frq>
Remarks: Returns the calibrator selected RF source frequency.

ML243xA command supported

SNRFCAL (Set RF Reference Calibrator State)

SNRFCAL? (Query RF Reference Calibrator State)


Set Command: SNRFCAL<ws><state>
Details: <state> ON | OFF
Remarks: Turns ON or OFF the selected RF reference calibrator.

Query Command: SNRFCAL?


Return String: SNRFCAL <state>
Remarks: Returns the selected RF reference calibrator state.

13000-00163 7-3
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Calibration and Zero Commands

ML243xA command supported

SNZERO (Zero the Selected Sensor)


Set Command: SNZERO <s>
Details: <s> A|B
Remarks: This command will execute a zero sequence on the selected
power sensor. Zeroing a power sensor compensates for noise
and thermal EMF of the device under test. This is
recommended prior to taking important power readings in the
bottom 20 dB of a power sensor’s dynamic range.

7-4 13000-00163
September 2005
Chapter 8. System Commands

Function Command Page reference

Audible Beep on Entry Error State - Set or Query SYBEEPS 8-13

BNC 1 Output Mode - Set or Query BNC1M 8-6

BNC 2 Output Mode – Set or Query BNC2M 8-7


BNC Analogue Output Display Power Start Value - BNDST 8-9
Set or Query
BNC Analogue Output Display Power Stop Value- BNDSP 8-8
Set or Query
BNC Analogue Output Start Voltage Scale – Set or BNVOST 8-11
Query
BNC Analogue Output Stop Voltage Scale - Set BNVOSP 8-11
BNC Output Channel Configuration - Set or Query BNOCH 8-10

BNC Pass Voltage Level - Set or Query BNPLEV 8-10

Display Backlight Adjust - Set or Query SYDLIT 8-14


Display Measurement Points - Set or Query SYDRES 8-15
GPIB Address - Set or Query SYADDR 8-12
GPIB Response Buffering State - Set or Query SYBUFS 8-13

Graphics Look-up Table Entries - Output SYLUT 8-18


Output Device Identification SYOI 8-22
RS232 Baud Rate - Set or Query SYBAUD? 8-12

Save Configuration *SAV 8-2


Saved setup - Output over the GPIB NVOUT 8-5
Saved Setup Name - Set or Query NVNAME? 8-4
Saved Setup store - Load NVLOAD 8-3

Screen Image - Output SYIMAGE 8-17

Secure System State - Set or Query NVSECS 8-22


Stored Setups - Recall *RCL 8-2
Tactile Feedback Sound State - Set or Query SYTACTS 8-20
User Defined Display Text State - Set or Query SYTEXTS 8-21

User Text ID string – Set or Query SYTEXT 8-20

13000-00163 8-1
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA System Commands

Save/Recall
*RCL (Recall Stored Setups)
Set Command: *RCL<ws><store>
Details: <store> 1 Æ 20
Remarks: The ML248xA / ML249xA can store up to 20 instrument
configurations for convenient recall. The configuration
parameters stored are Sensor Setup, Channel Setup, and
Trigger Setup.
This command sets the ML248xA / ML249xA to a configuration
previously stored in memory locations 1 through to 20.
Trying to recall a setup from an empty memory store will set
the Execution (EXE) bit in the Event Status Register (ESR).

*SAV (Save Configuration)


Set Command: *SAV <ws><store>
Details: <store> 1 Æ 20
Remarks: Saves the configuration of the power meter into the memory
location specified by the settings store number. Sensor Setup,
Channel Setup, and Trigger Setup are saved along with all
other instrument parameters.

8-2 13000-00163
September 2005
System Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

ML243xA command supported

NVLOAD (Load Saved Setup store over the GPIB)


Set Command: NVLOAD<ws><store number><,><data length><,><binary
data>
Details: <store number> 1 Æ 20
<data length> Number of bytes of binary data
<binary data> Data previously read from the meter using
the NVOUT command.

Remarks: This command writes to the instrument a binary-formatted


saved setup store that had been previously read using the
NVOUT command. Note that the contents of <binary_data>
cannot be edited because of the encoding scheme employed.
Use this command as a convenient way to quickly configure
one or more instruments to the same settings. This command
will overwrite any data held at <store_number>. Before
writing, ensure that the target store does not contain important
configuration settings.

13000-00163 8-3
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA System Commands

ML243xA command supported

NVNAME (Set Saved Setups Name)

NVNAME? (Query Saved Setup Name)


Set Command: NVNAME<ws><store_number><,><store_name>
Details: <store_number> 1 Æ 20
<text> Name string (16 characters max.)
Remarks: This command allows the saved setups to have a user-defined
text string associated to them rather than just the ‘USED’ and
‘NOT USED’ text. An execution error is returned if attempting
to send this command to an unused store.
Query Command: NVNAME?<ws><store_number>
Return String: NVNAME <store number>,<store name>
Details: <store_name> USED | NOT USED | ‘user_defined_string’
USED Returned when a setup is saved (using
the *SAV command)
NOT USED Returned when querying a free store.
‘user defined string’ A user-defined name string previously
set using this command.
Querying All Stores:
Sending the query command in the following formats will return
the status of all stores:
NVNAME?
Or alternatively NVNAME? 0
The return string will be in the following format:
NVNAME 1,<store _1 _name>,2,<store _2 name>,
… ,20,<store_20_name>

8-4 13000-00163
September 2005
System Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

ML243xA command supported

NVOUT (Output the saved setup over the GPIB)


Query Command: NVOUT<ws><store_number>
Details: <store_number> 0 (current setup) | 1 Æ 20 (saved stores)
Return String: NVOUT<ws><#><num_digits><data_length >,<binary data>
Details: <digits_length> The number of digits for the following
<data_length> field
<data_length> The number of bytes of binary data in
<binary_data>
<binary data> Saved setup in binary format
Remarks: Requests that the saved stored setup is output over the GPIB.
This is a BINARY output that allows the stored setup to be
programmed into other ML248xA / ML249xA series power
meters and stores via the NVLOAD command. If a request for
a store number that has not had a setup stored into it is made,
an execution error event will be set in the Event Status
Register (ESR).

13000-00163 8-5
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA System Commands

Config
BNC1M (Set BNC 1 Output Mode Select)

BNC1M? (Query BNC 1 Output Mode)


Set Command: BNC1M<ws><mode>
Details: <mode> OFF | AOUT | PSFL | LVLA1 | LVLA2 |

OFF Output tied to ground


AOUT Analogue scaled output
PSFL Pass/Fail Logic level output
LVLA1 Slow Signal channel range 1 amplifier output for
sensor A
LVLA2 Slow Signal channel range 2 amplifier output for
sensor A

Remarks: Selects the output mode for the rear panel BNC1 connector.
Note: Mode AOUT applies to CW or Pulsed/Modulated Readout
measurement modes only.
Query Command: BNC1M?
Return String: BNC1M <mode>
Remarks: Returns the BNC1 output mode setting.

8-6 13000-00163
September 2005
System Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

BNC2M (Set BNC 2 Output Mode Select)

BNC2M? (Query BNC 2 Output Mode)


Set Command: BNC2M<ws><mode>
Details: <mode> OFF | AOUT | PSFL | LVLB1 | LVLB2 | TRIG |
OFF Output set 0V DC
AOUT Analogue scaled output
PSFL Pass/Fail Logic level output
LVLB1 Slow Signal channel range 1 amplifier output for
sensor B
LVLB2 Slow Signal channel range 2 amplifier output for
sensor B
TRIG Measurement channel trigger signal
Remarks: Selects the output mode for the rear panel BNC2 connector.
Note: Mode AOUT applies to CW or Pulsed/Modulated Readout
measurement modes only. Mode TRIG applies the internal
and external triggers in CW and Pulsed/Modulated
measurement modes.
Query Command: BNC2M?
Return String: BNC2M <mode>
Remarks: Returns the BNC output setting.

13000-00163 8-7
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA System Commands

ML243xA command supported

BNDSP (Set BNC Analogue Output Display Power Stop Value)

BNDSP? ( Query BNC Analogue Output Display Stop Value)


Set Command: BNCDSP<ws><bnc><,><units><,><power>
Details: <bnc> 1|2
<units> DB | DBM | DBUV | DBMV | DBW | W
DB dB
DBM dBm
DBUV dBµV
DBMV dBmV
DBW Dbw
W Watts
<power> -270.00 Æ +260.00 dB | dBm
-163.00 Æ +367.00 dBµV
-223.00 Æ +307.00 dBmV
-283.00 Æ +247.00 dBW
0.00 Æ 999.99 MW (clipped)
Note: The instrument keeps separate <power> settings for each
supported <units>. The user can program the <power> for
each of the <units> independent of the units currently applied
to the active measurement channel. When changing the
channel display units (using the command CHUNIT), the
instrument will apply the correct <power> setting from the
appropriate <unit> store.
Remarks: This command defines the Stop Power associated to the rear
panel analogue output voltage (see BNVOST command) .
When the selected <bnc> is configured in ‘Analogue Scaled
Output’ mode (see BNC1M,BNC2M commands), the
instrument uses the Power Range (defined by Start/Stop
Power with BNDSP,BNDST) to derive a voltage at the <bnc>
output proportional to the power measurement.

Query Command: BNDSP?<ws><bnc><,><units>


Return String: BNDSP <bnc>,<units>,<power>
Remarks: Returns the BNC analogue output display stop power for the
selected units.

8-8 13000-00163
September 2005
System Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

ML243xA command supported

BNDST (Set BNC Analogue Output Display Power Start Value)

BNDST? Query BNC Analogue Output Display Power Start Value)


Set Command: BNDST<ws><bnc><,><units><,><power>
Details: <bnc> 1|2
<units> DB | DBM | DBUV | DBMV | DBW | W
DB dB
DBM dBm
DBUV dBµV
DBMV dBmV
DBW Dbw
W Watts

<power> -270 Æ +260dB | dBm


-163.00 Æ +367.00 dBµV
-223.00 Æ +307.00 dBmV
-283.00 Æ +247.00 dBW
0.00 Æ 999.99 MW (clipped)
Note: The instrument keeps separate <power> settings for each
supported <units>. The user can program the <power> for
each of the <units> independent of the units currently applied
to the active measurement channel. When changing the
channel display units (using the command CHUNIT), the
instrument will apply the correct <power> setting from the
appropriate <unit> store.
Remarks: This command defines the Start Power associated to the rear
panel analogue output voltage (see BNVOST and BNVOSP
commands). When the selected <bnc> is configured in
‘Analogue Scaled Output’ mode (see BNC1M, BNC2M
commands), the instrument uses the Power Range (defined by
Start/Stop Power with BNDSP,BNDST) to derive a voltage at
the <bnc> output proportional to the power measurement.
Query Command: BNDST?<ws><bnc><,><units>
Return String: BNDST <bnc>,<units>,<power>
Remarks: Returns the BNC analogue output display start power for the
selected units.

13000-00163 8-9
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA System Commands

ML243xA command supported

BNOCH (Set BNC Output Channel Configuration)

BNOCH? (Query BNC Output Channel Configuration)


Set Command: BNOCH<ws><bnc><,><channel>
Details: <bnc> 1|2
<channel> 1|2
Remarks: This command applies only to ‘Analogue Scaled Output’ and
‘Pass/Fail’ BNC output modes (see BNC1M, BNC2M
commands). The source <signal> channel can be routed to
the selected <bnc> output connector.
Query Command: BNOCH?<ws><bnc>>
Return String: BNOCH <bnc>,<channel>
Remarks: Returns the BNC output channel configuration setting.

ML243xA command supported

BNPLEV (Set BNC Pass Voltage Level)

BNPLEV? (Select BNC Pass Voltage Level)


Set Command: BNPLEV<ws><port><,><volt_level>
Details: <bnc> 1|2
<volt_level> HIGH (TTL high is PASS)
LOW (TTL low is PASS)
Remarks: This command allows selection of which TTL voltage level
(+5V or –5V) will be set at the BNC output to signify a PASS in
a PASS/FAIL measurement setup (see BNC1M, BNC2M
commands).

Query Command: BNPLEV?<ws><port>


Return String: BNPLEV <port>,<volt_level>
Remarks: Returns the <volt_level> setting for the <bnc> Output Pass
Level.

8-10 13000-00163
September 2005
System Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

ML243xA command supported

BNVOSP (Set BNC Analogue Output Stop Voltage Scale)

BNVOSP? (Query BNC Analogue Output Stop Voltage Scale)


Set Command: BNVOSP<ws><bnc><,><volts>
Details: <bnc> 1|2
<volts> –5.00 Æ +5.00 Volts
Remarks: This command sets the analogue voltage stop value for the
‘Analogue Scaled Output’ BNC Output Mode (see BNC1M,
BNC2M). An execution error is returned if attempting to set
the start value to a voltage greater than the stop value or vice
versa.
Query Command: BNVOSP?<ws><bnc>
Return String: BNVOSP <bnc>,<volts>
Remarks: Returns the stop voltage setting for the ‘Analogue Scaled
Output’ BNC Output Mode (see BNC1M, BNC2M).

ML243xA command supported

BNVOST (Set BNC Analogue Output Start Voltage Scale)

BNVOST? (Query BNC Analogue Output Start Voltage Scale)


Set Command: BNVOST<ws><bnc><,><volts>
Details: <bnc> 1|2
<volts> –5.00 Æ +5.00 Volts
Remarks: This command sets the analogue voltage start value for the
‘Analogue Scaled Output’ BNC Output Mode (see BNC1M,
BNC2M). An execution error is returned if attempting to set
the start value to a voltage greater than the stop value or vice
versa.
Query Command: BNVOST?<ws><bnc>
Return String: BNVOST <bnc>,<volts>
Remarks: Returns the voltage scale start value for the BNC Output Mode
‘Analogue’ setting.

13000-00163 8-11
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA System Commands

ML243xA command supported

SYADDR (Set GPIB Address)

SYADDR? (Query GPIB Address)


Set Command: SYADDR <ws><val>
Details: <val> 1 Æ 30 (Decimal value)
Remarks: Selects the GPIB address. NOTE: Once the address has been
changed, the ML248xA / ML249xA will no longer respond to
the GPIB default address 13.

ML243xA command supported

SYBAUD (Set RS232 Baud Rate)

SYBAUD? (Query RS232 Baud Rate)


Set Command: SYBAUD<ws><baud_rate>
Details: <baud_rate> 12 | 24 | 48 | 96 | 192 | 384 | 576 hundred bits
per second.
Remarks: Sets the RS232 Baud rate for the rear panel serial port.

Query Command: SYBAUD?


Return String: SYBAUD <baud_rate>
Remarks: Returns the RS232 Baud rate setting.

8-12 13000-00163
September 2005
System Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

ML243xA command supported

SYBEEPS (Set Audible Beep on Entry Error State)

SYBEEPS? (Query Audible Beep on Entry Error State)


Set Command: SYBEEPS<ws><state>
Details: <state> OFF | ON
Remarks: Turns the user entry error warning beep ON or OFF.

Query Command: SYBEEPS?


Return String: SYBEEPS <state>
Remarks: Returns the state of the error beep.

ML243xA command supported

SYBUFS (Set GPIB Response Buffering State)

SYBUFS? (Query GPIB Response Buffering State)


Set Command: SYBUFS <state>
Details: <state> OFF | ON
Remarks: When this command is set to ON, if a request for data is made
to the instrument, the response data will be placed in a GPIB
output buffer for the controller to access and retrieve. If
another data request is made and the previous data has not
been retrieved from the output buffer; the new data will be
queued after the previous data.
If buffering is set to OFF, whenever a request for data is made
to the instrument (except by serial poll), the output buffer is
cleared and the only data in the output queue will be the
response to the last data request made. The output buffer is
cleared once a valid GPIB data request command has been
recognised.

Query Command: SYBUFS?


Return String: SYBUFS <state>
Remarks: Returns the state of GPIB buffering setting.

13000-00163 8-13
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA System Commands

SYDLIT (Set Display Backlight Adjust)

SYDLIT? (Query Display Backlight Adjust)


Set Command: SYDLIT<ws><setting>
Details: <setting> DIM | MEDIUM | BRIGHT
DIM DIM setting
MEDIUM MEDIUM setting
BRIGHT BRIGHT setting
Remarks: Sets the display backlight brightness adjust.

Query Command: SYDLIT?


Return String: SYDLIT <setting>
Remarks: Returns the current setting for the display backlight adjust.

8-14 13000-00163
September 2005
System Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

SYDRES (Set Display Measurement Points)

SYDRES? (Query Display Measurement Points)


Set Command: SYDRES<ws><num_points>
Details: <num_points> P200 | P400
P200 Plots 200 measurement points (one measurement
for each pixel on the display panel)
P400 Plots 400 measurement points (two measurements
for each pixel on the display panel)
Note: This setting affects the number of profile measurement
readings returned over GPIB (when sending the appropriate
Pulsed/Modulated Profile commands i.e. PMPO etc.). See also
TRCAPT command:
ML248xA models:
P200 200 readings/channel
P400 400 readings/channel

ML249xA models – Capture Time > 200 ns :


P200 200 readings/channel
ML249xA models – Capture Time < 200 ns :
P200 ‘N’ readings/channel
where N = capture time / 1ns + 1

ML249xA models – Capture Time > 400 ns :


P400 400 readings/channel
ML249xA models – Capture Time < 400 ns :
P400 ‘N’ readings/channel
where N = capture time / 1ns + 1

Example1: With the ML249xA, <num_points> = P400, capture


time = 300ns
N = 301 readings/channel

Example2: With the ML249xA, <num_points> = P200, capture


time = 50ns
N = 51 readings/channel

13000-00163 8-15
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA System Commands

Remarks: This command changes the number of measurement points


plotted on the front panel display when in Pulsed/Modulated
Profile display mode.

Query Command: SYDRES?


Return String: SYDRES < num_points >
Remarks: Returns the current setting for the number of displayed
measurement points.

8-16 13000-00163
September 2005
System Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

SYIMAGE (Output Displayed Screen Image)


Set Command: SYIMAGE
Return String: SYIMAGE <#><length><number_of_bytes><data_byte_1> …
<data_byte_n>
Details: <length> A single digit number in ASCII decimal
defining the length of
<number_of_bytes> digits which follows
(digit 5 in this case for full screen
image)
<number_of_bytes> A 5-digit string, the numeric value of
which indicates the number of data
bytes contained in the data that follows
(76800 bytes for 320 x 240 pixels
display size).
<data_byte_n> A single 8-bit data byte
Remarks: Captures the screen image being displayed on the LCD panel.
The screen image data is output as a definite length arbitrary
block data of size 76.8 Kbytes.
The range for each <data_byte_n> is between 0 and 255. The
numeric value of <data_byte_n> represents the index into a
256 look-up table entry. Each entry within the look-up table
defines the RGB (red-green-blue) values that make up the
colour seen on the LCD panel. The look-up table is defined
separately and can be downloaded using the SYLUT
command.
Notes: To preserve the menu keys when going to remote, the
instrument must be placed into ‘Screen Dump Mode’. This
mode can only be enabled from the front panel pressing the
keys: System > Config > Display > Screen Dump Mode.

13000-00163 8-17
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA System Commands

SYLUT (Output Graphics Look-up Table Entries)


Set Command: SYLUT
Return String: SYLUT <#><length><number_of_bytes><data_byte_1> …
<data_byte_n>
Details: <length> A single digit number in ASCII decimal
defining the length of
<number_of_bytes> digits that follows
(digit number 3 in this case for the
look-up table size).
<number_of_bytes> A 3-digit string whose numeric value
indicates the number of data bytes
contained in the data that follows (768
bytes for 256 * RGB table, where
RGB = 3 bytes).
<data_byte_n> A single 8-bit data byte.
Remarks: Outputs the graphics colour look-up table entries. The look-up
table data is formatted as a definite length arbitrary block data.
Each 3-byte data block represents the Red, Green and Blue
values for one look-up table entry.

8-18 13000-00163
September 2005
System Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

SYSTEP (Set Increment/Decrement Step)

SYSTEP? (Query Increment/Decrement Step)


Set Command: SYSTEP<ws><unit_type><,><value>[<suffix_mult>][<suffix_unit>]
Details: <unit_type> DB | W | V | A | % or PCT | TIME | FREQ | ULESS
<value> see below for allowed ranges
<suffix_mult>
<suffix_unit>
DB log values’ step
W Watts values’ step
V Voltage values’ step
A Amp values’ step
% or PCT percentage values’ step
TIME time values’ step
FREQ frequency values’ step
ULESS unit-less values’ step
The range of the <value> parameter depends upon the
<unit_type> selected:
dB 0.01 dB to 10.00 dB
Watts 1.00 µW to 10.00 GW
Volts 1.00 µV to 1.00 MV
Amps 1.00 µA to 1.00 A
% 0.01% to 1000.00%
Time 1.00 µs to 1.00 s
Frequency 1.00 kHz to 10.00 GHz
Unitless 1.00 µ to 1.00 M
NOTE: If <suffix_mult> is not specified, the default units are
assumed, e.g. Watts (W).
Remarks: Sets the value of the selected increment/decrement step.
Query Command: SYSTEP?<ws>< unit_type >
Return String: SYSTEP < unit_type >,< value >
Remarks: Returns the current value of the selected increment/decrement
step

13000-00163 8-19
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA System Commands

ML243xA command supported

SYTACTS (Set Tactile Feedback Sound State)

SYTACTS? (Query Tactile Feedback Sound State)


Set Command: SYTACTS<ws><state>
Details: <state> OFF | ON
Remarks: When SYTACTS is set to ON, tactile feedback is enabled.
Pressing a key on the instrument front panel will produce an
audible key click.

Query Command: SYTACTS?


Return String: SYTACTS <state>
Remarks: Returns the state of the audible key click setting.

ML243xA command supported

SYTEXT (Write User Text ID string)

SYTEXT? (Query User Text ID string)


Set Command: SYTEXT<ws><text_string>
Details: <text_string> Text string of up to 20 characters
Remarks: Defines a text string to be displayed on the instrument front
panel (normally used for identification purposes when
operating the instrument remotely). Use the SYTEXTS
command to turn display the string on the front panel.

Query Command: SYTEXT?


Return String: SYTEXT <text_string>
Remarks: Returns the remote text ID string currently held in the
instrument.

8-20 13000-00163
September 2005
System Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

ML243xA command supported

SYTEXTS (Set User Defined Display Text State)

SYTEXTS? (Query User Defined Display Text State)


Set Command: SYTEXTS <state>
Details: <state> ON | OFF
Remarks: This command turns ON or OFF the display of a user-defined
text string entered using the SYTEXT command.

Query Command: SYTEXTS?


Return String: SYTEXTS <state>
Remarks: Returns the state of the user-defined text display setting.

13000-00163 8-21
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA System Commands

Service
ML243xA command supported

NVSECS (Set Secure System State)

NVSECS? (Query Secure System State)


Set Command: NVSECS<ws><state>
Details: <state> OFF | ON
Remarks: When set to ON, the instrument will erase its non-volatile
memory and default to the factory settings at power on.
When turning the unit ON with secure state disabled, the
ML248xA / ML249xA will return to the configuration settings it
was left in when last powered OFF. Enabling secure state can
be useful when wishing to delete any sensitive information
from the instrument.
Query Command: NVSECS?
Return String: NVSECS <state>
Remarks: Returns the secure state of the instrument.

ML243xA command supported

SYOI (Output Device Identification)


Query Command: SYOI
Return String: <Company name>,<model>,<serial>,<firmware version>
Details: <company name> ASCII string (7 characters)
<model> ML248xA / ML249xA
<serial> Instrument unique serial number
<firmware version> Current firmware version loaded into the
instrument.
Remarks: Returns the instrument identification string. This command
performs the equivalent action of the *IDN? command.

8-22 13000-00163
September 2005
Chapter 9. Preset Commands
Function Command Page reference

Factory Reset NVFRST 9-3


Pre-defined Application Setup Number - Set or NVAPN 9-2
Query

13000-00163 9-1
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Preset Commands

NVAPN (Preset Instrument to Pre-defined Application Setup


Number)

NVAPN? (Query Instrument Pre-defined Application Setup Number)


Set Command: NVAPN<ws><store_num>
Details: <store_num> 1 Æ 20
Remarks: Presets the instrument to pre-defined applications setups. See
below for a list of factory presets.

1. Reset

2. Factory Reset

3. GSM 900

4. GSM 1800

5. EDGE

6. GPRS

7. WCDMA

8. CDMA2000

9. WLAN 802.11a

10. WLAN 802.11b

11. WLAN 802.11g

12. Bluetooth
®

13. IS95

14. not used

15. not used

16. not used

17. not used

18. not used

19. not used

20. not used


NOTE: See *RST or NVFRST commands for more
information if selecting ‘Reset’ or ‘Factory Preset’
Query Command: NVAPN?
Return String: NVAPN <store_num>
Remarks: Returns the store number for the pre-defined application
currently applied to the selected channel.

9-2 13000-00163
September 2005
Preset Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

ML243xA command supported

NVFRST (Factory Reset)


Set Command: NVFRST
Remarks: Resets the ML2430A Series to the factory default
configuration. Unlike the *RST command, the offset tables are
cleared and all external interfaces are reset. Note that any
settings in the *ESE and *SRE registers prior to this command
will be reset. The equivalent front panel key sequence is
PRESET | Factory
WARNING: It may be necessary to reinitialise the connection
to the instrument after sending this command.

13000-00163 9-3
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Preset Commands

9-4 13000-00163
September 2005
Chapter 10. Data Acquisition Commands

Function Command Page reference

Channel Readings – Output specified number CWON 10-3


CW Channel Readings - Output CWO 10-2

Pulsed / Modulated Graph Max Data - Output in ASCII PMXPO 10-18


Format
Pulsed / Modulated Profile - Output max binary log PMXPBLO 10-15

Pulsed / Modulated Profile - Output min binary log PMNPBLO 10-4

Pulsed / Modulated Profile Data - Output in ASCII PMPO 10-12


Format
Pulsed / Modulated Profile Data - Output in Binary PMPBO 10-8
Format
Pulsed/Modulated Profile Max Data - Output in Binary PMXPBO 10-17
Format
Pulsed/Modulated Profile Min Data - Output in ASCII PMNPO 10-8
format
Pulsed/Modulated Profile Min Data - Output in Binary PMNPBO 10-6
Format
Readout Measurements - Output over Capture Time PMRDO 10-13

13000-00163 10-1
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Data Acquisition Commands

ML243xA command supported

CWO (Output CW Channel Readings)


Query Command: CWO<ws><c>
Return String: <c> 1 | 2 | 1&2
Details: Channel 1 | 2
CWO <c>,<reading>
Channels 1&2
CWO<c>,<ch1_reading>,<ch2_reading>
An execution error is returned in the following instances:
a) Channel 1 | 2 requests: If channel turned OFF or not set
to CW.
b) Channels 1&2 requests: If either channel turned OFF or
either channel not set to CW.

Remarks: When in CW mode, this command returns a measurement


reading for the selected channel. Multiple requests for
readings by sending this command repeatedly will be queued
in the instrument output buffer, if GPIB buffering is enabled
(see SYBUFS command). The MAV bit in the status byte
indicates whether there are any readings available in the
buffer.
Notes: The recommended practice for requesting measurement data
over GPIB is to use TR-type commands to ensure that up-to-
date readings are obtained, in particular after sending
configuration commands that affect the measured power (e.g.
sending the SNOFIX command to add an offset to the
measurements). If TR-type commands are not used, a ‘Wait
Delay’ should be introduced between the configuration
commands and the data acquisition command to ensure that
any changes to the instrument set-up have rippled through to
the measurement system.

10-2 13000-00163
September 2005
Data Acquisition Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

ML243xA command supported

CWON (Output Specified Number of Channel Readings)


Query Command: CWON<ws><c><,><num_readings>
Details: <c> 1 | 2 | 1&2
<num_reading> 1 Æ 1500
Return String: Channels 1 | 2
<reading_1>, …<reading_n>
Channels 1&2
ch1_reading_1>,<ch2_reading_1>, …
<ch1_reading_n>,<ch2_reading_n>
Details: <reading_n> Measurements for the selected channels up to
<num_readings>
Remarks: This command returns the requested number of readings for
the specified channel. The number of readings are all first
collected and buffered internally, before being returned over
the GPIB as a whole.
Example:
If measuring a fairly steady power on each channel at
approximately the following levels.
Channel 1: –10 dBm approx.
Channel 2: –25 dBm approx.
Sending the command CWON 1&2, 8 will return 16 readings
in the following order:
–10.234, –25.449, –10.234, –25.732,–10.235, –25.694, –
10.238, –25.043, –10.250, –25.230, –10.270, –25.883, –
10.500, –25.049, –10.291, –25.175
Notes: The recommended practice for requesting measurement data
over GPIB is to use TR-type commands to ensure that up-to-
date readings are obtained, in particular after sending
configuration commands that affect the measured power (e.g.
sending the SNOFIX command to add an offset to the
measurements). If TR-type commands are not used, a ‘Wait
Delay’ should be introduced between the configuration
commands and the data acquisition command to ensure that
any changes to the instrument set-up have rippled through to
the measurement system.

13000-00163 10-3
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Data Acquisition Commands

PMNPBLO (Output Pulsed / Modulated Profile Min Binary Long


Format)
Query PMNPBLO<ws><c>
Command:
Details: <c> 1 | 2 | 1&2
Return String for channels 1 | 2:
PMNPBLO <c>,<#><length><num_bytes><data_byte_1>...
<data_byte_n>

Return String for channels 1&2:


PMNPBLO<c>,<#><length><num_bytes><ch1_data_byte_1>...
<ch1_data_byte_n><ch2_data_byte_1> ...<ch2_data_byte_n>

<length> number of ASCII characters making up the num_bytes


value
<num_bytes> Number of bytes of data contained in rest of the string
<data_byte_n> Four (4) bytes will make up a single measurement
reading
Remarks: This command restricts the range of valid measurement units to
logarithmic units only (i.e. dB(m), dBmV, dBuV and dBW). If using this
command to request data from a channel whose configuration for
measurement units is different from the above, an execution error will be
returned.
Outputs the Pulsed/Modulated profile minimum data in binary format.
Each measurement reading returned with this command is encoded as a
4-byte LONG INTEGER. Each reading is also multiplied by fixed value
of 1024 (10-bit left shift) to minimise rounding errors when converting to
single-precision floating point.
This command will return for each channel, either 800 bytes in
<num_bytes> (e.g. 200 points * 4 bytes/reading) or 1600 bytes (e.g.
400 points * 4 bytes/reading) depending on the number of points
resolution setting (see SYDRES command).
Note: On the ML249xA in RRS Mode, if the trigger capture time is
below 200 ns with 200 points display (or below 400 ns with 400 points
display), the instrument’s graph measurement buffers will be resized to
‘N’ data points at 1ns resolution (where N = capture time / 1ns + 1). For
example, with a capture time of 50ns, the number of readings taken per
measurement sweep will be 50 + 1 (including the measurement at time
stamp 0 ns). Therefore, when requesting data over GPIB using this
command <num_elements> will be set to 51 (i.e. there will be 51
measurement readings available). In LONG INTEGER format
<num_bytes> will be set to 204 (i.e. 51 * 4bytes/reading).
When selecting <c> to be 1&2, <num_bytes> value will be the total
number of bytes for both channels. Data for channel 1 will be output
first, immediately followed by channel 2 data.
The recommended practice for requesting measurement data over GPIB
is to use TR-type commands to ensure that up-to-date readings are
obtained, in particular after sending configuration commands that affect
the measured power (e.g. sending the SNOFIX command to add an
offset to the measurements). If not using TR-type commands, then a

10-4 13000-00163
September 2005
Data Acquisition Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

‘Wait Delay’ should be introduced between the configuration commands


and the data acquisition command to ensure that any changes to the
instrument setup have rippled through to the measurement system.
Example:
If the following 4-byte Hex value string is assigned to a long integer
variable, its value is:
FF FF D1 64 = –11932
To convert the integer value to a floating point reading (based on
1024/dB scaling), divide by 1024 to get the dB value (–11.652 dB).
Note that the exact units (whether dBm or dBmV etc.) for the reading
depend upon the power meter configuration for Units on requesting
data.

13000-00163 10-5
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Data Acquisition Commands

PMNPBO (Output Pulsed/Modulated Profile Min Data in Binary


Format)
Query Command: PMNPBO<ws><c>
<c> 1 | 2 | 1&2
Return String: Channels 1 | 2
PMNPBO
<c>,<#><length><num_bytes><data_byte_1> ...<data_byte_n>
Channels 1&2
PMNPBO<c>,<#><length><num_bytes><ch1_data_byte_1>
...<ch1_data_byte_n>
Details: <length> Number of ASCII characters making up
the <num_of_bytes> value
<num_of_bytes> Number of bytes of data contained in
rest of the string
<data_byte_n> Four (4) of these values make up a
floating point reading.
Remarks: Outputs the Pulsed/Modulated profile minimum data in binary
format to the GPIB (as a definite length arbitrary block
response data).
Note: If <c> is 1&2, the <num_of_bytes> value will double to show
the total bytes output. The data for channel 1is output first,
immediately followed by the data for channel 2.
Each of the measurement readings is encoded in a 4-byte
single precision floating-point value.
This command will return 800 bytes in <num_bytes> (200
points * 4 bytes/reading) or 1600 bytes (400 points * 4
bytes/reading) per channel depending on the number of points
resolution setting.
Note: On the ML249xA in RRS Mode, if the trigger capture
time is below 200 ns with 200 points display (or below 400 ns
with 400 points display), the instrument’s graph measurement
buffers will be resized to ‘N’ data points at 1ns resolution
(where N = capture time / 1ns + 1). For example, with a
capture time of 50ns, the number of readings taken per
measurement sweep will be 50 + 1 (including the measurement
at time stamp 0 ns). Therefore, when requesting data over
GPIB using this command <num_elements> will be set to 51
(i.e. there will be 51 measurement readings available). In
floating point format <num_bytes> will be 204 (i.e. 51 *
4bytes/reading).
The recommended practice for requesting measurement data
over GPIB is to use TR-type commands to ensure that up-to-
date readings are obtained, in particular after sending
configuration commands that affect the measured power (e.g.

10-6 13000-00163
September 2005
Data Acquisition Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

sending the SNOFIX command to add an offset to the


measurements). If not using TR-type commands, then a ‘Wait
Delay’ should be introduced between the configuration
commands and the data acquisition command to ensure that
any changes to the instrument setup have rippled through to
the measurement system.

13000-00163 10-7
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Data Acquisition Commands

PMNPO (Output Pulsed/Modulated Profile Min Data in ASCII


format)
Query Command: PMNPO<ws><c>
Details: <c> 1 | 2 | 1&2
Remarks: This command returns the next complete set of
pulsed/modulated MINIMUM graph data points in ASCII
format. The data returned will be either 200 or 400 readings
per channel depending on the number of points resolution
setting (see SYDRES command).
Note: On the ML249xA in RRS Mode, if the trigger capture
time is below 200 ns with 200 points display (or below 400 ns
with 400 points display), the instrument’s graph measurement
buffers will be resized to ‘N’ data points at 1ns resolution
(where N = capture time / 1ns + 1). For example, with a
capture time of 50ns, the number of readings taken per
measurement sweep will be 50 + 1 (including the
measurement at time stamp 0 ns). Therefore, when requesting
data over GPIB using this command <num_elements> will be
set to 51 (i.e. there will be 51 measurement readings
available).
When selecting <c> to be 1&2, <num_elements> will be the
total number of readings for both channels. The measurement
data for channel 1 will be output first, immediately followed by
channel 2 measurements.
Note: The recommended practice for requesting measurement data
over GPIB is to use TR-type commands to ensure that up-to-
date readings are obtained, in particular after sending
configuration commands that affect the measured power (e.g.
sending the SNOFIX command to add an offset to the
measurements). If not using TR-type commands, then a ‘Wait
Delay’ should be introduced between the configuration
commands and the data acquisition command to ensure that
any changes to the instrument setup have rippled through to
the measurement system.
Return String: Channels 1 | 2
PMNPO <c>,<num_elements>,<element_1>, … <element_n>
<c> 1 | 2 | 1&2
Channels 1&2
PMNPO <c>,<num_elements>,<ch1_element_1>,
…<ch1_element_n>
Details: <num_elements> The total number of data points
<element_n> Readings

10-8 13000-00163
September 2005
Data Acquisition Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

PMPBLO (Output Pulsed / Modulated Profile in Binary Long Format


Query Command: PMPBLO<ws><c>
Details: <c> 1 | 2 | 1&2
Return String: Channels 1 | 2
PMPBLO
<c>,<#><length><num_bytes><data_byte_1>...<data_byte_n>
Channels 1&2
PMPBLO<c>,<#><length><num_bytes><ch1_data_byte_1>
...<ch1_data_byte_n> <ch2_data_byte_1>
...<ch2_data_byte_n>
<length> number of ASCII characters making up the
num_bytes value
<num_bytes> Number of bytes of data contained in rest of
the string
<data_byte_n> Four (4) bytes will make up a single
measurement reading
Remarks: This command restricts the range of valid measurement units
to logarithmic units only (i.e. dB(m), dBmV, dBuV and dBW). If
using this command to request data from a channel whose
configuration for measurement units is different from the
above, an execution error will be returned.
Outputs the Pulsed/Modulated profile average data in binary
format. Each measurement reading returned with this
command is encoded as a 4-byte LONG INTEGER. Each
reading is also multiplied by fixed value of 1024 (10-bit left
shift) to minimise rounding errors when converting to single-
precision floating point.
This command will return for each channel, either 800 bytes in
<num_bytes> (e.g. 200 points * 4 bytes/reading) or 1600
bytes (e.g. 400 points * 4 bytes/reading) depending on the
number of points resolution setting (see SYDRES command).
Note: On the ML249xA in RRS Mode, if the trigger capture
time is below 200 ns with 200 points display (or below 400 ns
with 400 points display), the instrument’s graph measurement
buffers will be resized to ‘N’ data points at 1ns resolution
(where N = capture time / 1ns + 1). For example, with a
capture time of 50ns, the number of readings taken per
measurement sweep will be 50 + 1 (including the
measurement at time stamp 0 ns). Therefore, when requesting
data over GPIB using this command <num_elements> will be
set to 51 (i.e. there will be 51 measurement readings
available). In LONG INTEGER format <num_bytes> will be
204 (i.e. 51 * 4bytes/reading).

13000-00163 10-9
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Data Acquisition Commands

When selecting <c> to be 1&2, <num_bytes> value will be the


total number of bytes for both channels. Data for channel 1
will be output first, immediately followed by channel 2 data.
The recommended practice for requesting measurement data
over GPIB is to use TR-type commands to ensure that up-to-
date readings are obtained, in particular after sending
configuration commands that affect the measured power (e.g.
sending the SNOFIX command to add an offset to the
measurements). If not using TR-type commands, then a ‘Wait
Delay’ should be introduced between the configuration
commands and the data acquisition command to ensure that
any changes to the instrument setup have rippled through to
the measurement system.
Example:
If the following 4-byte Hex value string is assigned to a long
integer variable, its value is:
FF FF D1 64 = –11932
To convert the integer value to a floating point reading (based
on 1024/dB scaling), divide by 1024 to get the dB value (–
11.652 dB).
Note that the exact units (whether dBm or dBmV etc.) for the
reading depend upon the power meter configuration for Units
on requesting data.

10-10 13000-00163
September 2005
Data Acquisition Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

PMPBO (Output Pulsed / Modulated Profile Data in Binary Format)


Query Command: PMPBO<ws><c>
Details: <c> 1 | 2 | 1&2
Remarks: Outputs the Pulsed/Modulated profile average graph data in
binary format to the GPIB (as a definite length arbitrary block
response data). Each of the measurement readings is encoded in
a 4-byte single precision floating-point value.
This command will return 800 bytes in <num_bytes> (200 points *
4 bytes/reading) or 1600 bytes (400 points * 4 bytes/reading) per
channel depending on the number of points resolution setting.
When selecting <c> to be 1&2, <num_bytes> value will be the
total number of bytes for both channels. Data for channel 1 will
be output first, immediately followed by channel 2 data.
Note: On the ML249xA in RRS Mode, if the trigger capture time
is below 200 ns with 200 points display (or below 400 ns with 400
points display), the instrument’s graph measurement buffers will
be resized to ‘N’ data points at 1ns resolution (where N = capture
time / 1ns + 1). For example, with a capture time of 50ns, the
number of readings taken per measurement sweep will be 50 + 1
(including the measurement at time stamp 0 ns). Therefore, when
requesting data over GPIB using this command <num_elements>
will be set to 51 (i.e. there will be 51 measurement readings
available). In floating point format <num_bytes> will be 204 (i.e.
51 * 4bytes/reading).
Return String: Channels 1|2
PMPBO <c>,<#><length><num_bytes><data_byte_1>...
<data_byte_n>
Channels 1&2
PMPBO <c>,<#><length><num_bytes><ch1_data_byte_1>...
<ch1_data_byte_n>
Details: <length> number of ASCII characters making up the
num_bytes value.
<num_bytes> number of bytes of data contained in rest of
the string.
<data_byte_n> four of these values make up the long integer.
Note: The recommended practice for requesting measurement data
over GPIB is to use TR-type commands to ensure that up-to-date
readings are obtained, in particular after sending configuration
commands that affect the measured power (e.g. sending the
SNOFIX command to add an offset to the measurements). If TR-
type commands are not used, a ‘Wait Delay’ should be introduced
between the configuration commands and the data acquisition
command to ensure that any changes to the instrument set-up
have rippled through to the measurement system.

13000-00163 10-11
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Data Acquisition Commands

PMPO (Output Pulsed / Modulated Profile Data in ASCII Format)


Query Command: PMPO<ws><c>
Details: <c> 1 | 2 | 1&2
Return String: Channels 1|2
PMPO <c>,<num_elements>,<element_1>, … <element_n>
<c> 1 | 2 | 1&2
Channels 1&2
PMPO <c>,<num_elements>,<ch1_element_1>, …
<ch1_element_n>,
<num_elements> The total number of measurement data
points
<element_n> Measurement readings
Remarks: This command returns the next complete set of
pulsed/modulated AVERAGE graph data points in ASCII
format. The data returned will be either 200 or 400 readings
per channel depending on the number of points resolution
setting (see SYDRES command).
Note: On the ML249xA in RRS Mode, if the trigger capture
time is below 200 ns with 200 points display (or below 400 ns
with 400 points display), the instrument’s graph measurement
buffers will be resized to ‘N’ data points at 1ns resolution
(where N = capture time / 1ns + 1). For example, with a
capture time of 50ns, the number of readings taken per
measurement sweep will be 50 + 1 (including the
measurement at time stamp 0 ns). Therefore, when requesting
data over GPIB using this command <num_elements> will be
set to 51 (i.e. there will be 51 measurement readings
available).
When selecting <c> to be 1&2, <num_elements> will be the
total number of readings for both channels. The measurement
data for channel 1 will be output first, immediately followed by
channel 2 measurements.
Note: The recommended practice for requesting measurement data
over GPIB is to use TR-type commands to ensure that up-to-
date readings are obtained, in particular after sending
configuration commands that affect the measured power (e.g.
sending the SNOFIX command to add an offset to the
measurements). If TR-type commands are not used, a ‘Wait
Delay’ should be introduced between the configuration
commands and the data acquisition command to ensure that
any changes to the instrument set-up have rippled through to
the measurement system.

10-12 13000-00163
September 2005
Data Acquisition Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

PMRDO (Output Readout Measurements over Capture Time)


Query PMRDO<ws><c>
Command:
Details: <c> 1 | 2 | 1&2
Return Channels 1 | 2
String:
PMRDO <c>,<meas_type>, <ct_data>
Channels 1&2
PMRDO <c>,<ch1_meas_type>,<ch1_ct_data>,
<ch2_meas_type>,<ch2_ct_data>
<meas_type> The measurement type number 1 Æ 5
<ct_data> The measurements over the capture time
When selecting channels 1&2, channel 1 readings will be output first,
followed immediately by channel 2 as shown in the return string format
above.
Number :Measurement Type:
1 Average Power
2 Average Power, Peak Power
3 Average Power, Peak Power, Crest Factor
4 Average Power, Min Power & Time , Max Power & Time
5 Average Power, Held Min Power & Time, Held Max Power &
Time
The format of <ct_data> will be different depending upon the selected
measurement type number. A two-letter prefix always precedes the
measurements readings to help decoding the data string:
No. Data Format
1 <PA>,<avg_pow>
2 <PA>,<Avg_pow>,<PK>,< Pk_pow>
3 <PA>,<Avg_pow>,<PK>,< Pk_pow>,<CF>,<Cres_Fact>
4 <PA>,<Avg_pow,<PN>,<min_pow>,<TN>,<min_time>,<PX>,
<max_pow>,<TX>,<max_time>
5 <PA>,<Avg_pow>,<PHN>,<hmin_pow>,<THN>,<hmin_time>,
<PHX>,<hmax_pow>,<THX>,<hmax_time>
The 2-letter prefixes have the following meanings:
PA Average Power
PK Peak Power
CF Crest Factor

13000-00163 10-13
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Data Acquisition Commands

PN Min Power
TN Time of Min Power in units of seconds (s)
PX Max Power
TX Time of Max Power in units of seconds (s)
PHN Held Min Power
PHX Held Max Power
THN Time of Held Min Power in units of seconds (s)
THX Time of Held Max Power in units of seconds (s)

Remarks: When in Pulsed/Modulated mode, this command returns measurement


readings over the whole capture time. Power readings will be returned
in the units currently selected for the measurement channel (see
CHUNIT). The time readings relate to the time at which the minimum
or maximum power reading occurred with respect to the trigger point
and it is always returned in units of seconds. The measurement
readings type <meas_type> is selected using the PMMEAS command.
Note that these measurements are only available if there are NO
ENABLED GATES, (see GPMO, GPAMO, GPNMO commands for
gating patterns measurements acquisition). An execution error is
returned if the selected channel mode is not Pulsed/Modulated or there
are one or more enabled gating patterns.
Notes: The recommended practice for requesting measurement data over
GPIB is to use TR-type commands to ensure that up-to-date readings
are obtained, in particular after sending configuration commands that
affect the measured power (e.g. sending the SNOFIX command to add
an offset to the measurements). If TR-type commands are not used, a
‘Wait Delay’ should be introduced between the configuration
commands and the data acquisition command to ensure that any
changes to the instrument set-up have rippled through to the
measurement system.

10-14 13000-00163
September 2005
Data Acquisition Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

PMXPBLO (Output Pulsed / Modulated Profile Max Binary Long


Format)
Query Command: PMXPBLO<ws><c>
Details: <c> 1 | 2 | 1&2
Return String: Channel 1 | 2
PMXPBLO <c>,<#><length><num_bytes><data_byte_1>...
<data_byte_n>
Channel 1&2
PMXPBLO <c>,<#><length><num_bytes><ch1_data_byte_1>...
<ch1_data_byte_n><ch2_data_byte_1> ...<ch2_data_byte_n>
<length> number of ASCII characters making up the
num_bytes value
<num_bytes> Number of bytes of data contained in rest of the
string
<data_byte_n> Four (4) bytes will make up a single
measurement reading
Remarks: This command restricts the range of valid measurement units to
logarithmic units only (i.e. dB(m), dBmV, dBuV and dBW). If
using this command to request data from a channel whose
configuration for measurement units is different from the above,
an execution error will be returned.
Outputs the Pulsed/Modulated profile maximum data in binary
format. Each measurement reading returned with this command
is encoded as a 4-byte LONG INTEGER. Each reading is also
multiplied by fixed value of 1024 (10-bit left shift) to minimise
rounding errors when converting to single-precision floating point.
This command will return for each channel, either 800 bytes in
<num_bytes> (e.g. 200 points * 4 bytes/reading) or 1600 bytes
(e.g. 400 points * 4 bytes/reading) depending on the number of
points resolution setting (see SYDRES command).
Note: On the ML249xA in RRS Mode, if the trigger capture time
is below 200 ns with 200 points display (or below 400 ns with 400
points display), the instrument’s graph measurement buffers will
be resized to ‘N’ data points at 1ns resolution (where N = capture
time / 1ns + 1). For example, with a capture time of 50ns, the
number of readings taken per measurement sweep will be 50 + 1
(including the measurement at time stamp 0 ns). Therefore, when
requesting data over GPIB using this command <num_elements>
will be set to 51 (i.e. there will be 51 measurement readings
available). In LONG INTEGER format <num_bytes> will be 204
(i.e. 51 * 4bytes/reading).
When selecting <c> to be 1&2, <num_bytes> value will be the
total number of bytes for both channels. Data for channel 1 will
be output first, immediately followed by channel 2 data.

13000-00163 10-15
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Data Acquisition Commands

The recommended practice for requesting measurement data


over GPIB is to use TR-type commands to ensure that up-to-date
readings are obtained, in particular after sending configuration
commands that affect the measured power (e.g. sending the
SNOFIX command to add an offset to the measurements). If not
using TR-type commands, then a ‘Wait Delay’ should be
introduced between the configuration commands and the data
acquisition command to ensure that any changes to the
instrument setup have rippled through to the measurement
system.

Example:
If the following 4-byte Hex value string is assigned to a long
integer variable, its value is:
FF FF D1 64 = –11932
To convert the integer value to a floating point reading (based on
1024/dB scaling), divide by 1024 to get the dB value (–11.652
dB).
Note that the exact units (whether dBm or dBmV etc.) for the
reading depend upon the power meter configuration for Units on
requesting data.

10-16 13000-00163
September 2005
Data Acquisition Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

PMXPBO (Output Pulsed/Modulated Profile Max Data in Binary


Format)
Query PMXPBO<ws><c>
Command:
Details: <c> 1 | 2 | 1&2
Remarks: Outputs the Pulsed/Modulated profile maximum graph data in binary
format to the GPIB (as a definite length arbitrary block response data).
Each measurement reading is encoded in a 4-byte single-precision
floating point format.
This command will either return 800 bytes in <num_bytes> (e.g. 200
points * 4 bytes/reading) or 1600 bytes (e.g. 400 points * 4
bytes/reading) per channel depending on the number of points
resolution setting (see SYDRES command).
Note: On the ML249xA in RRS Mode, if the trigger capture time is below
200 ns with 200 points display (or below 400 ns with 400 points display),
the instrument’s graph measurement buffers will be resized to ‘N’ data
points at 1ns resolution (where N = capture time / 1ns + 1). For
example, with a capture time of 50ns, the number of readings taken per
measurement sweep will be 50 + 1 (including the measurement at time
stamp 0 ns). Therefore, when requesting data over GPIB using this
command <num_elements> will be set to 51 (i.e. there will be 51
measurement readings available). In floating point format <num_bytes>
will be 204 (i.e. 51 * 4bytes/reading).
When selecting <c> to be 1&2, <num_bytes> value will be the total
number of bytes for both channels. Data for channel 1 will be output first,
immediately followed by channel 2 data.
Return Channel 1 | 2
String:
PMXPBO<c>,<#><length><num_bytes><data_byte_1> ...<data_byte_n>
Channel 1&2
PMXPBO <c>,<#><length><num_bytes><ch1_data_byte_1>...
<ch1_data_byte_n>
Details: <length> Number of ASCII characters making up the
‘number_of_bytes’ value.
<num_of_bytes> Number of bytes of data contained in rest of the
string.
<data_byte_n> Four (4) of these values make up a floating point
reading.
Note: The recommended practice for requesting measurement data over GPIB
is to use TR-type commands to ensure that up-to-date readings are
obtained, in particular after sending configuration commands that affect
the measured power (e.g. sending the SNOFIX command to add an
offset to the measurements). If not using TR-type commands, then a
‘Wait Delay’ should be introduced between the configuration commands
and the data acquisition command to ensure that any changes to the
instrument setup have rippled through to the measurement system.

13000-00163 10-17
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Data Acquisition Commands

PMXPO (Output Pulsed / Modulated Graph Max Data in ASCII


Format)
Query Command: PMXPO<ws><c>
Details: <c> 1 | 2 | 1&2
Remarks: This command returns the next complete set of
pulsed/modulated MAXIMUM graph data points in ASCII
format. The data returned will be either 200 or 400 readings
per channel depending on the number of points resolution
setting (see SYDRES command).
Note: On the ML249xA in RRS Mode, if the trigger capture
time is below 200 ns with 200 points display (or below 400 ns
with 400 points display), the instrument’s graph measurement
buffers will be resized to ‘N’ data points at 1ns resolution
(where N = capture time / 1ns + 1). For example, with a
capture time of 50ns, the number of readings taken per
measurement sweep will be 50 + 1 (including the
measurement at time stamp 0 ns). Therefore, when requesting
data over GPIB using this command <num_elements> will be
set to 51 (i.e. there will be 51 measurement readings
available).
When selecting <c> to be 1&2, <num_elements> will be the
total number of readings for both channels. The measurement
data for channel 1 will be output first, immediately followed by
channel 2 measurements.
Notes: The recommended practice for requesting measurement data
over GPIB is to use TR-type commands to ensure that up-to-
date readings are obtained, in particular after sending
configuration commands that affect the measured power (e.g.
sending the SNOFIX command to add an offset to the
measurements). If not using TR-type commands, then a ‘Wait
Delay’ should be introduced between the configuration
commands and the data acquisition command to ensure that
any changes to the instrument setup have rippled through to
the measurement system.
Return String: Return String for channels 1 | 2:
PMXPO <c>,<num_elements>,<element_1>, … <element_n>
Return String for channels 1&2:
PMXPO <c>,<num_elements>,<ch1_element_1>, …
<ch1_element_n>, <ch2_element_1>, <ch2_element_n>
Details: <c> 1 | 2 | 1&2
<num_elements> The total number of measurement data
points
<element_n> Measurement readings

10-18 13000-00163
September 2005
Chapter 11. Instrument Status Commands
Function Command Page reference

Continue SYCONT 11-2


DDE Error List - Query SYERLST 11-3

Fast Mode SYFAST 11-5


Initial Startup Self-test Command SYSTART 11-6
Return results of POST or *TST SYTEST 11-15

Set display update SYDISP 11-2


Status Message SYSTATE 11-7

13000-00163 11-1
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Instrument Status Commands

ML243xA command supported

SYCONT (Continue)
Set Command: SYCONT
Remarks: This command will allow the system to continue the start-up
sequence if there are self-test failures other than DSP errors.

ML243xA command supported

SYDISP (Set Display Update)

SYDISP? (Query Display Update)


Set Command: SYDISP<ws><state>
Details: <state> OFF | ON
Remarks: This command controls the measurement display update on
the instrument front panel to increase GPIB throughput. When
the display update is turned OFF, there will be no
measurement updates on the front panel and the instrument
will indicate that the display update is turned OFF.
Note: Turning the instrument’s power OFF or carrying out an
instrument Preset will return this setting to its default ON value.
Query command: SYDISP?
Return string: SYDISP <state>
Remarks: Returns the status of the display update setting.

11-2 13000-00163
September 2005
Instrument Status Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

ML243xA command supported

SYERLST (DDE Error List Query)


Set Command: SYERLST
Remarks: On detecting a DDE (Device Dependent Error) event, this
command returns the error list giving the state of the DDE
causes.
Reading the error list by issuing the SYERLST command will
automatically clear the list just read from the instrument queue.
In addition the error list queue will be updated by any further
occurrence of the listed events.
The SYERLST response is returned in the following format:
ABCDEFGHIJKLMN!OOOOOO!PPPPPP!
A Sensor A SNZERO state: 0 - ZERO done,
1 - Not done, 2 - SNZERO failed.
B Sensor B SNZERO state: 0 - ZERO done,
1 - Not done, 2 - SNZERO failed.
C Sensor A SNCAL state: 0 - Done, 1 - Failed.
D Sensor B SNCAL state, 0 - Done, 1 - Failed.
E Sensor A range hold: 0 - OK, 1 - Over range,
2 – Under range.
F Sensor B range hold: 0 - OK, 1 – Over range,
2 – Under range.
G Display channel 1 reading out of range:
0 - OK, 1 - Over range, 2 – Under range.
H Display channel 2 reading out of range:
0 - OK, 1 - Over range, 2 – Under range.
I Display channel 1 illegal log operation: 0 - OK,
1 - Error.
J Display channel 2 illegal log operation: 0 - OK,
1 - Error.
K Sensor A fitted and used state: 0 - Fitted,
1 - Not fitted or used
L Sensor B fitted and used state: 0 - Fitted,
1 - Not fitted and used
M Display channel 1 limits state: 0 - Passed,
1 - High limit failed, 2 – Low limit failed
N Display channel 2 limits state: 0 - Passed,
1 - High limit failed, 2 – Low limit failed.
OOOOOO Last cause of a GPIB command error.
PPPPPP Last cause of a GPIB execution error.

13000-00163 11-3
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Instrument Status Commands

The GPIB command error and GPIB execution error are


always enclosed within exclamation marks (!). If no errors have
been produced since the last SYERLST was read, the
SYERLST will end with '!!!'.
Note: When read for the first time after start-up, a sensor may be
reported as not fitted even though it is. This is because the
error condition of a sensor used in a channel configuration was
recorded before the sensor initialisation was completed. If a
sensor is not used in a channel configuration, it will be
reported as Zeroed, although it may not have been. If the
sensor is then used in a channel configuration, its zero status
will be correctly reported.

11-4 13000-00163
September 2005
Instrument Status Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

ML243xA command supported

SYFAST (Fast Mode)

SYFAST? (Fast Mode)


Set Command: SYFAST<ws><state>
Details: <state> OFF | ON
Remarks: This command increase GPIB data transfer for a limited set of
data output commands (see list below for Fast Mode compliant
commands). Note that the instrument still operates in 488.2
compliant mode
The command sequence to set up the instrument into Fast
Mode is as follows:
Pulsed / Modulated Measurement Mode :
CHUNIT <c> , DBM
PMAVGS <c> , OFF
SYDISP OFF
SYFAST ON
CW Measurement Mode :
CHUNIT <c> , DBM
CWAVG <c> , OFF
CWSETLP <c>, 10
SYDISP OFF
SYFAST ON
Where: <c> 1 | 2

Note that the SYFAST command must be the last command in


the command sequence before requesting measurement
readings.
Below is a list of the Fast Mode Compliant commands that will
give the highest possible data throughput.
1. CWO
2. GPAMO
Notes: In Fast Mode the following restrictions apply:
• Only ‘Average’ readings available
• Measurements updates on screen will stop and a
message will appear indicating the instrument is in fast
mode.

13000-00163 11-5
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Instrument Status Commands

• Measurement requests for both channels as one


message (channel 1&2) are not handled.
• Measurements will be output in dBm units only.
• Readings are formatted in floating point, three decimal
point digits only ( i.e. +/- nnn.fff ).
• RS232 support disabled.
• Sensor over / under range reporting disabled.

Query Command: SYFAST?


Return String: SYFAST <state>

SYSTART (Initial Startup Self-test Command)


Set Command: SYSTART
Remarks: This is useful for ATE control. After the system has been given
time to start up, this command can be used to find out what
state the system is in. If the self-test has failed, 'SYCONT' can
be used to get the system running. This is an initial startup
self test status command and will return one of the following:
0 Passed self-test and running.
1 Startup self test ongoing.
-1 Start up self-test FAILED.
In this stage of the startup process, all commands except
SYTEST, SYSTART, SYCONT and GPIB 488.2 event and
status commands will produce a GPIB execution error.
SYTEST will return the self-test result string.

11-6 13000-00163
September 2005
Instrument Status Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

ML243xA command supported

SYSTATE (Status Message)


Set SYSTATE
Command:
Remarks: Replies with the power meter’s current status code. In this format, the
number of identical letters specify the number of digits, with preceding
zeroes for padding if necessary.
The format is:
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRRRRSSSSTUVWXXYYZΑΒΧ∆∆∆ΕΕΕΦΓΗΙϑΚΛ
ΜΝΟΠΘΡ
Where:
A= Channel 1 Measurement Mode
B= Channel 2 Measurement Mode
C= Channel Linking State
D= Channel 1 input configuration
E= Channel 2 input configuration
F= Channel 1 units
G= Channel 2 units
H= Channel 1 Trigger Source
I= Channel 2 Trigger Source
J= Internal Trigger Edge
K= External Trigger Edge
L= Channel 1 relative status
M= Channel 2 relative status
N= Channel 1 limit checking type
O= Channel 2 limit checking type
P= Channel 1 limit lines checking
Q= Channel 2 limit lines checking
RRRR = Channel 1 Gating Patterns state
SSSS = Channel 2 Gating Patterns state
T= Channel 1 Gating Patterns Repeat state
U= Channel 2 Gating Patterns Repeat state
V= Channel 1 Gating Pattern Measurements
W= Channel 1 Gating Pattern Measurements
XX = Sensor A range hold

13000-00163 11-7
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Instrument Status Commands

YY = Sensor B range hold


Z= Sensor A Input Offset Mode
Α= Sensor B Input Offset Mode
Β= Channel 1 averaging mode:
Χ= Channel 2 averaging mode
∆∆∆ = Channel 1 averaging number
ΕΕΕ = Channel 2 averaging number
Φ= Channel 1 low level averaging
Γ= Channel 2 low level averaging
Η= Channel 1 Post-processing function
Ι= Channel 2 Post-processing function
ϑ= Sensor A zeroed status
Κ= Sensor B Zeroed status
Λ= BNC1 Output Configuration
Μ= BNC2 Output Configuration
Ν= GPIB trigger mode
Ο= GPIB group trigger mode
Π= Calibrator state
Θ= Calibrator Frequency
Ρ= GPIB FAST status

See below for a breakdown of status codes.


A = Channel 1 Measurement Mode:
0 = CW
1 = P/M Profile
2 = P/M Readout
B = Channel 2 Measurement Mode:
0 = CW
1 = P/M Profile
2 = P/M Readout
C = Channel Linking State:
0 = OFF
1 = ON

11-8 13000-00163
September 2005
Instrument Status Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

D = Channel 1 input configuration:


1=A
2=B
3 = A–B
4 = B–A
5 = A/B
6 = B/A
7 = EXT Volts
E = Channel 2 input configuration:
1=A
2=B
3 = A–B
4 = B–A
5 = A/B
6 = B/A
7 = EXT Volts
F = Channel 1 units:
0 = dBm
1 = Watts
2 = Volts
3 = dBuV
4 = dBmV
5 = dBW
G = Channel 2 units:
0 = dBm
1 = Watts
2 = Volts
3 = dBuV
4 = dBmV
5 = dBW
H = Channel 1 Trigger Source:
0 = Internal A
1 = Internal B
2 = External TTL

13000-00163 11-9
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Instrument Status Commands

4 = Continuous
5 = Internal A AUTOMATIC Trigger
6 = Internal B AUTOMATIC Trigger
I = Channel 2 Trigger Source:
0 = Internal A
1 = Internal B
2 = External TTL
4 = Continuous
5 = Internal A AUTOMATIC Trigger
6 = Internal B AUTOMATIC Trigger
J = Internal Trigger Edge
0 = Channel 1 RISING, Channel 2 RISING
1 = Channel 1 FALLING, Channel 2 RISING
2 = Channel 1 RISING, Channel 2 FALLING
3 = Channel 1 FALLING, Channel 2 FALLING
K = External Trigger Edge
0 = RISE
1 = FALL
L = Channel 1 relative status:
0 = Rel OFF
1 = Rel ON
M = Channel 2 relative status:
0 = Rel OFF
1 = Rel ON
N = Channel 1 limits
0 = OFF
1 = SIMPLE
2 = COMPLEX
O = Channel 2 limits
0 = OFF
1 = SIMPLE
2 = COMPLEX
P = Channel 1 limit lines checking:
0 = UPPER

11-10 13000-00163
September 2005
Instrument Status Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

1 = LOWER
2 = BOTH
Q = Channel 2 limit lines checking:
0 = UPPER
1 = LOWER
2 = BOTH
RRRR = Channel 1 Gating Patterns state:
0000 = All Gates OFF
1000 = Gate 1 ON
1100 = Gate 1 ON, Gate 2 ON
1110 = Gate 1 ON, Gate 2 ON, Gate 3 ON
1111 = All Gates ON
SSSS = Channel 2 Gating Patterns state:
0000 = All Gates OFF
1000 = Gate 1 ON
1100 = Gate 1 ON, Gate 2 ON
1110 = Gate 1 ON, Gate 2 ON, Gate 3 ON
1111 = All Gates ON
T = Channel 1 Gating Pattern 1 Repeat state:
0 = OFF
1 = ON
U = Channel 2 Gating Pattern 1 Repeat state:
0 = OFF
1 = ON
V = Channel 1 Gating Pattern Measurements:
0 = Average
1 = Average, Peak
2 = Average,Peak,Crest
3 = Average,Max power, Min power, Max-Min time
4 = Averag, Held Max power, Held Min power, Held
Max-Min time
W = Channel 2 Gating Pattern Measurements:
0 = Average
1 = Average, Peak

13000-00163 11-11
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Instrument Status Commands

2 = Average,Peak,Crest
3 = Average,Max power, Min power, Max-Min time
4 = Averag, Held Max power, Held Min power, Held
Max-Min time
XX = Sensor A range:
01 to 06 CW Manual Hold
11 to 16 CW Auto-range
07 to 09 P/M Manual Hold
17 to 19 P/M Auto-range
YY = Sensor B range hold:
01 to 06 CW Manual Hold
11 to 16 CW Auto-range
07 to 09 P/M Manual Hold
17 to 19 P/M Auto-range
Z = Sensor A Input Offset Mode:
0 = OFF
1 = Fixed
2 = Table
Α = Sensor B Input Offset Mode:
0 = OFF
1 = Fixed
2 = Table
Β = Channel 1 Averaging mode:
0 = OFF
1 = AUTO
2 = Moving
3 = Repeat
4 = Exponential (P/M only)
Χ= Channel 2 Averaging mode:
0 = OFF
1 = AUTO
2 = Moving
3 = Repeat
4 = Exponential (P/M only)

11-12 13000-00163
September 2005
Instrument Status Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

∆∆∆ = Channel 1 averaging number


This number is between 1 and 512.
ΕΕΕ = Channel 2 averaging number
This number is between 1 and 512.
Φ = Reserved for future use.
0 = Not Applicable
Γ = Reserved for future use.
0 = Not Applicable
Η = Channel 1 Post-processing function
0 = OFF
2 = Statistics
3 = PAE
Ι = Channel 2 Post-processing function
0 = OFF
2 = Statistics
3 = PAE
ϑ = Sensor A Zero status:
0 = Not zeroed
1 = Zeroed
Κ = Sensor B Zeroed status:
0 = Not zeroed
1 = Zeroed
Λ = BNC1 Output Configuration:
0 = OFF
1 = Analog Out
2 = Pass /Fail
4 = Levelling A1
5 = Levelling A2
Μ = BNC2 Output Configuration:
0 = OFF
1 = Analog Out
2 = Pass /Fail
4 = Levelling B1

13000-00163 11-13
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Instrument Status Commands

5 = Levelling B2
8 = Trigger Out
Ν = GPIB trigger mode:
0 = TR0 hold ON
1 = Free run
Ο = GPIB group trigger mode:
0 = GTO
1 = GT1
2 = GT2
Π = Calibrator state:
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Θ= Calibrator Frequency
0 = 50 MHz
1 = 1 GHz
Ρ = GPIB FAST mode status:
0 = OFF
1 = ON

11-14 13000-00163
September 2005
Instrument Status Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

SYTEST (Return results of POST or *TST)


Set SYTEST
Command:
Remarks: Returns a message string holding the self test status results following a
power-on self-test (POST) or after issuing the command *TST. The
returned string is in the following format:
FLASH<ws>0xnnnn,CALDAT<ws>0xnnnn,PERSON<ws>0xnnnn,RAM
<ws>0xnnnn, NONVOL<ws>0xnnnn,LCD<ws>0xnnnn,KBD<ws>
0xnnnn, DSP<ws>0xnnnn,SPARTAN<ws>0xnnnn

Where: <ws> = white space.


The possible values returned are listed below:
FLASH (Flash Memory) checksum test:
0x0000 = Passed
0xffff = Failed
CALDAT (Cal Data) checksum test:
0x0000 = Passed
0xffff = Failed
PERSON (Personality data):
0x0000 = Passed
0xffff = Failed
RAM read/write test:
0x0000 = Passed
0xffff = Failed
NONVOL (Non-volatile) RAM test:
0x0000 = Passed
0x0001 = Software version fail
0x0002 = Current store fail
0x0004 = Saved store fail
0x0008 = secure mode fail
0xffff = read failure
LCD memory test:
0x0000 = Passed
0xffff = Failed
KBD (Keyboard) stuck key test:

13000-00163 11-15
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Instrument Status Commands

0x0000 = Passed
0xffff = Failed
DSP test:
0x0000 = Passed
else FATAL error
SPARTAN test:
0x0000 = Passed
0x0001 = Device startup failure – INIT line failed
to switch high
0x0002 = Device startup failure – DONE line
failed to switch low
0x0003 = Device loading failure – DONE line
failed to switch high
0xffff= General Device failure – Failed
initialisation sequence

11-16 13000-00163
September 2005
Chapter 12. Range Calibrator Commands
Function Command Page reference

Range Calibrator – Zero Sensor RCZERO 12-6


Input
Range Calibrator Data - Output RCD 12-2

Range Calibrator Diagnostics Test RCDIAGO 12-3


- Data Output
Range Calibrator Diagnostics Test RCDIAGT 12-4
– Set or Query
Range Calibrator Test - Abort RCABORT 12-2

Range Calibrator Test - Start RCTEST 12-5

13000-00163 12-1
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Range Calibrator Commands

RCABORT (Abort Range Calibrator Test)


Set Command: RCABORT
Remarks: This command ends the Range Calibrator test if a test is
currently running. If a test is not running, this command is
ignored. Partial test results will not be available when aborting
a test sequence prematurely. An execution error is returned if
the Range Calibrator is not connected to the power meter.

RCD (Range Calibrator Data Output)


Set Command: RCD<ws><s>
Details: <s> A|B
Return String: RCD <s>,<valid_flag>,<test_results>
Details: <valid_flag> TRUE | FALSE
<test_results> see below for data format
TRUE Indicates that a full test sequence has been
executed on the specified sensor and the
results are valid.
FALSE The test results are invalid. The Range
Calibrator has been disconnected and a new
test sequence has not been executed on the
specified sensor.
<test_results> <zero_level>,<range1_upper>,
<range1_lower>, …<range_N_upper>,
<range_N_lower>
where: N=5

<zero_level> The lowest measurable level for range 5


<range_N_upper> The upper level for the measurement
range
<range_N_lower> The lower level for the measurement
range

12-2 13000-00163
September 2005
Range Calibrator Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

Notes: A value of ‘0’ is returned in <test_results>, if the <valid_flag> is


FALSE (i.e. test results are invalid).
Remarks: This command returns the ML2419x Range Calibrator test
results for the specified sensor that become available once a
full test sequence has finished executing (see RCTEST
command). If a test sequence on the selected sensor has not
been requested, the <valid_flag> will be FALSE to indicate that
there is no valid data available for that sensor.
The test results of a test sequence are stored in memory and
can be retrieved over GPIB until a new Range Calibrator test
sequence is initiated or the ML2419x is disconnected from the
power meter. An execution error is returned if sending this
command while a test sequence is currently ongoing or if the
Range Calibrator is not connected to the power meter.

RCDIAGO (Range Calibrator Diagnostics Test Data Output)


Set Command: RCDIAGO
Return String: RCDIAGO <s>,<reading>
Details: <s> A|B
<reading> Averaged reading for the selected
measurement range test
Remarks: This commands returns the ML2419x Range Calibrator
Diagnostics readings for the selected range test (see
RCDIAGT command), which will become available as soon as
the instrument has obtained at least one test result from the
Range Calibrator.
Note: Note that each test result is averaged to all previous results,
therefore the <reading> returned over GPIB will be the latest
averaged reading since the start of the selected diagnostics
test sequence. An execution error is returned if this command
is sent when the Range Calibrator is not connected to the
power meter or the instrument is not in diagnostics mode.

13000-00163 12-3
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Range Calibrator Commands

RCDIAGT (Set Range Calibrator Diagnostics Test)

RCDIAGT? (Query Range Calibrator Diagnostics Test)


Set Command: RCDIAGT<ws><s><,><test>
Details: <s> A|B
<test> 0 Æ 10 ( see below )

0 ZERO LEVEL
1 RANGE 1 HIGH
2 RANGE 1 LOW
3 RANGE 2 HIGH
4 RANGE 2 LOW
5 RANGE 3 HIGH
6 RANGE 3 LOW
7 RANGE 4 HIGH
8 RANGE 4 LOW
9 RANGE 5 HIGH
10 RANGE 5 LOW
Remarks: This command switches to Range Calibrator Diagnostics Mode
and initiates the selected test on the target sensor input. The
selected test will run continuously at a rate determined by the
range selected and a factory pre-defined averaging at that
range. The selected test will stop when a new range is
selected or the user exits Diagnostics Mode by sending the
RCTEST command. Use the RCDIAGO command to obtain
the latest test result reading. An execution error is returned if
the Range Calibrator is not connected to the power meter.
Note: The instrument rejects this command and raises an execution
error if the Range Calibrator is currently running a full test
sequence (see RCTEST command). In this case the user
should wait until the test sequence has finished executing or
send the RCABORT command to exit the test sequence,
before attempting to send the RCDIAGT command again.
Query Command: RCDIAGT?
Return String: RCDIAGT <s>,<test>
Remarks: This command returns the Range Calibrator Diagnostics test
currently selected for the specified sensor. An execution error
is returned if sending the query command when the instrument
is not in diagnostics mode.

12-4 13000-00163
September 2005
Range Calibrator Commands ML248xA / ML249xA

RCTEST (Start Range Calibrator Test)


Set Command: RCTEST <ws><s>
Details: <s> A | B | A&B
Remarks: This commands initiates a Range Calibrator full test on the
selected sensor input(s) (see below). At the end of the test
sequence the test results can be obtained using the RCD
command. An execution error is returned if the Range
Calibrator is not connected to the power meter. A full test
involves the sequence below for each sensor input. The
sensor input is zeroed before each step is carried out.
Test ZERO LEVEL
Test RANGE 1 HIGH
Test RANGE 1 LOW
Test RANGE 2 HIGH
Test RANGE 2 LOW
Test RANGE 3 HIGH
Test RANGE 3 LOW
Test RANGE 4 HIGH
Test RANGE 4 LOW
Test RANGE 5 HIGH
Test RANGE 5 LOW
Note: The instrument accepts no other commands when this test is
running. For automatic notification on the Test sequence
being completed, send the *OPC command with this command
(e.g. RCTEST; *OPC ) and set up the OPC bit in the Event
Status Register to raise a SRQ on test sequence completion.

13000-00163 12-5
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Range Calibrator Commands

RCZERO (Diagnostics Zero Range Calibrator Sensor Input)


Set Command: RCZERO
Remarks: When in Diagnostics Mode, this command performs a Zero on
the selected sensor input. A Zero is always recommended
prior to requesting a reading, when first entering Diagnostics
Mode, or when switching to a new measurement range.
An execution error is returned if this command is sent when
the instrument is not configured in Diagnostics Mode or if the
Range Calibrator is not connected to the power meter.
Note: While a Zero is being carried out, no other commands will be
accepted. For automatic notification on the Zero sequence
being completed, send the *OPC command with this command
( e.g. RCZERO; *OPC ) and set up the OPC bit in the Event
Status Register to raise a SRQ.

12-6 13000-00163
September 2005
Chapter 13. Programming Examples
This chapter provides programming examples for the following functions.

• CW measurement

• Edge measurement

• GSM measurement

• GPRS measurement

• Multiple radar pulse measurement

• WLAN measurement

• WCDMA measurement

• Dual channel set up.

• Cal and Zero operations.

13000-00163 13-1
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Programming Examples

CW Measurement Example
Function CWMeas (avg_data as string, trace_data as string, num_meas as string)

‘allocate memory for TR mode


Dim trmode as Integer

‘set the meter into CW mode


Call Send (boardid, address, “CHMODE 1,CW”,NLend)

‘set the cal factor to frequency mode


Call Send(boardid, address, “SNCFSRC A,FREQ; SNCFRQ A,1MHZ”,NLend)

‘set the averaging mode to auto


Call Send(boardid, address, “CWAVG 1,AUTO”, NLend)

‘set the TR mode you want


trmode = x ‘x is replaced by either 1 or 2, depending on the data requested

‘trigger the meter


Call Send(boardid, address, “TR” & trmode, NLend)
Call Receive(boardid, address, buffer, STOPend)
avg_data = buffer ‘transfers the buffer data to a global string
buffer = “” ‘clears the buffer

‘collect trace and number data


Call Send(boardid, address, “CWO”, NLend)
Call Receive(boardid, address, buffer, STOPend)
trace_data = buffer ‘transfers the buffer data to a global string
buffer = “” ‘clears the buffer

Call Send(boardid, address, “CWON”, NLend)


Call Receive(boardid, address, buffer, STOPend)
num_meas = buffer ‘transfers the buffer data to a global string

13-2 13000-00163
September 2005
Programming Examples ML248xA / ML249xA

buffer = “” ‘clears the buffer

End Function

13000-00163 13-3
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Programming Examples

EDGE Measurement Example


Function EdgeMeas (avg_data as string, trace_data as string)

‘allocate memory for TR mode


Dim trmode as Integer

‘set the meter into PMOD mode


Call Send(boardid, address, “CHMODE 1,PMOD”,NLend)

‘set the measurement type to average and peak


Call Send(boardid, address, “PMMEAS 1,2”,NLend)

‘set a gate
Call Send(boardid, address, “GPGATS 1,1,ON; GPTIMST 1,1,57U; GPTIMSP 1,1,520U;
GPACTN 1,1”, NLend)

‘set a fence in the mid burst training region


Call Send(boardid, address, “GPFENS 1,1,ON; GPFENST 1,1,240U; GPFENSP
1,1,320U”, NLend)

‘set trigger capture time


Call Send(boardid, address, “TRCAPT 1,PMOD,625U”, NLend)

‘set trigger edge and hold-off


Call Send(boardid, address, “TRINEDG 1,PMOD,RISE; TRHOFS 1,ON;
TRHOFT 1,650U”, NLend)

‘set averaging
Call Send(boardid, address, “PMAVGS 1,ON; PMAVGN 1,16”, NLend)

‘set the TR mode you want


trmode = x ‘x is replaced by either 1 or 2, depending on the data requested

13-4 13000-00163
September 2005
Programming Examples ML248xA / ML249xA

‘trigger the meter


Call Send(boardid, address, “TR” & trmode, NLend)
Call Receive(boardid, address, buffer, STOPend)
avg_data = buffer ‘transfers the buffer data to a global string
buffer = “” ‘clears the buffer

‘collect other data such as trace data


Call Send(boardid, address, “PMPBO 1”, NLend)
Call Receive(boardid, address, buffer, STOPend)
trace_data = buffer ‘transfers the buffer data to a global string
buffer = “” ‘clears the buffer

End Function

13000-00163 13-5
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Programming Examples

GSM Measurement Example


Function GSMMeas (avg_data as string, trace_data as string)

‘allocate memory for TR mode


Dim trmode as Integer

‘load GSM set-up


Call Send(boardid, address, “NVAPN 1”,NLend)

‘set the meter into PMOD mode


Call Send(boardid, address, “CHMODE 1,PMOD”,NLend)

‘set a gate
Call Send(boardid, address, “GPGATS 1,1,ON; GPTIMST 1,1,57U; GPTIMSP 1,1,520U;
GPACTN 1,1”, NLend)

‘set a fence in the mid burst training region


Call Send(boardid, address, “GPFENS 1,1,ON; GPFENST 1,1,240U; GPFENSP
1,1,320U”, NLend)

‘set trigger capture time


Call Send(boardid, address, “TRCAPT 1,PMOD,625U”, NLend)

‘set trigger edge and hold-off


Call Send(boardid, address, “TRINEDG 1,PMOD,RISE; TRHOFS 1,ON; TRHOFT 1,650U”,
NLend)

‘set averaging
Call Send(boardid, address, “PMAVGS 1,ON; PMAVGN 1,16”, NLend)

‘set the TR mode you want


trmode = x ‘x is replaced by either 1 or 2, depending on the data requested

13-6 13000-00163
September 2005
Programming Examples ML248xA / ML249xA

‘trigger the meter


Call Send(boardid, address, “TR” & trmode, NLend)
Call Receive(boardid, address, buffer, STOPend)
avg_data = buffer ‘transfers the buffer data to a global string
buffer = “” ‘clears the buffer

‘collect other data such as trace data


Call Send(boardid, address, “PMPBO 1”, NLend)
Call Receive(boardid, address, buffer, STOPend)
trace_data = buffer ‘transfers the buffer data to a global string
buffer = “” ‘clears the buffer

End Function

13000-00163 13-7
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Programming Examples

GPRS Measurement Example


Function GPRSMeas (avg_data as string, trace_data as string)

‘allocate memory for TR mode


Dim trmode as Integer

‘set the meter into PMOD mode


Call Send(boardid, address, “CHMODE 1,PMOD”,NLend)

‘set gates on
Call Send(boardid, address, “GPGATS 1,1,ON; GPGATS 1,2,ON; GPGATS 1,3,ON;
GPGATS 1,4,ON”, NLend)

‘set gate times and active gate


Call Send(boardid, address, “GPTIMST 1,1,57U; GPTIMST 1,2,634U; GPTIMST
1,3,1.211M; GPTIMST 1,4,1.788M; GPTIMSP 1,1,520U; GPTIMSP 1,2,1.097M;
GPTIMSP 1,3,1.674M; GPTIMSP 1,4,2.251M; GPACTN 1,1”, NLend)

‘set gate repeat state


Call Send(boardid, address, “GP1REPS 1,ON; GP1REPN 1,4; GP1REPT 1,577U”,
NLend)

‘set trigger edge and hold-off


Call Send(boardid, address, “TRHOFS 1,ON; TRHOFT 1,2.308M”, NLend)

‘set the TR mode you want


trmode = x ‘x is replaced by either 1 or 2, depending on the data requested

‘trigger the meter


Call Send(boardid, address, “TR” & trmode, NLend)
Call Receive(boardid, address, buffer, STOPend)
avg_data = buffer ‘transfers the buffer data to a global string
buffer = “” ‘clears the buffer

13-8 13000-00163
September 2005
Programming Examples ML248xA / ML249xA

‘collect other data such as trace data


Call Send(boardid, address, “GPMO 1”, NLend)
Call Receive(boardid, address, buffer, STOPend)
trace_data = buffer ‘transfers the buffer data to a global string
buffer = “” ‘clears the buffer

End Function

13000-00163 13-9
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Programming Examples

Multiple Radar Pulse Measurement Example


Function MRPMeas (mrk_data as string, gate_data as string)
‘set the meter into PMOD mode
Call Send(boardid, address, “CHMODE 1,PMOD”,NLend)

‘set gates on
Call Send(boardid, address, “GPGATS 1,1,ON; GPGATS 1,2,ON”, NLend)

‘set gate times and active gate


Call Send(boardid, address, “GPTIMST 1,1,0.5U; GPTIMST 1,2,10.5U; GPTIMSP
1,1,1.5U; GPTIMSP 1,2,11.5U; GPACTN 1,1”, NLend)

‘set a marker
Call Send(boardid, address, “MKACTN 1,1; MKTMIN 1”, NLend)

‘set trigger capture time and trigger edge


Call Send(boardid, address, “TRCAPT 1,PMOD,20U; TRINEDG 1,PMOD,RISE”, NLend)

‘set averaging mode


Call Send(boardid, address, “PMAVGS 1,ON; PMAVGN 1,16”, NLend)

‘get the marker values


Call Send(boardid, address, “MKACTO 1”, NLend)
Call Receive(boardid, address, buffer, STOPend)
mrk_data = buffer ‘transfers the buffer data to a global string
buffer = “” ‘clears the buffer

‘get gate values


Call Send(boardid, address, “GPMO 1”, NLend)
Call Receive(boardid, address, buffer, STOPend)
gate_data = buffer ‘transfers the buffer data to a global string
buffer = “” ‘clears the buffer
End Function

13-10 13000-00163
September 2005
Programming Examples ML248xA / ML249xA

WLAN Measurement Example


Function WLANMeas (avg_data as string)

‘set the meter into PMOD mode


Call Send(boardid, address, “CHMODE 1,PMOD”,NLend)

‘set gates on
Call Send(boardid, address, “GPGATS 1,1,ON; GPGATS 1,2,ON”, NLend)

‘set gate times and active gate


Call Send(boardid, address, “GPTIMST 1,1,0; GPTIMST 1,2,200U; GPTIMSP 1,1,16U;
GPTIMSP 1,2,300U; GPACTN 1,1”, NLend)

‘set a marker
Call Send(boardid, address, “MKACTN 1,1; MKTMIN 1”, NLend)

‘set trigger capture time and trigger edge


Call Send(boardid, address, “TRCAPT 1,PMOD,500U; TRINEDG 1,PMOD,RISE”, NLend)

‘set averaging mode


Call Send(boardid, address, “PMAVGS 1,ON; PMAVGN 1,16”, NLend)

‘get gate values


Call Send(boardid, address, “GPMO 1”, NLend)
Call Receive(boardid, address, buffer, STOPend)
gate_data = buffer ‘transfers the buffer data to a global string
buffer = “” ‘clears the buffer

End Function

13000-00163 13-11
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Programming Examples

WCDMA Measurement Example


Function WCDMAMeas (gate_data as string)

‘allocate memory for TR mode


Dim trmode as Integer

‘set the meter into PMOD mode


Call Send(boardid, address, “CHMODE 1,PMOD”,NLend)

‘set meter to read average peak and crest power


Call Send(boardid, address, “PMMEAS 1,3”, NLend)

‘set trigger to continuous


Call Send(boardid, address, “TRSRC 1,PMOD,CONT”, NLend)

‘set trigger to encompass all data


Call Send(boardid, address, “TRCAPT 1,PMOD,10M”, NLend)

‘set the TR mode you want


trmode = x ‘x is replaced by either 1 or 2, depending on the data requested

‘trigger the meter


Call Send(boardid, address, “TR” & trmode, NLend)
Call Receive(boardid, address, buffer, STOPend)
avg_data = buffer ‘transfers the buffer data to a global string
buffer = “” ‘clears the buffer

End Function

13-12 13000-00163
September 2005
Programming Examples ML248xA / ML249xA

Dual Channel Set Up Example


Function DCMeas (mrk_data as string, gate_data as string, mrk_rpt as string,
mrk_rpf as string)

‘set the meter into PMOD mode


Call Send(boardid, address, “CHMODE 1,PMOD; CHMODE 2,PMOD”,NLend)

‘set gates on
Call Send(boardid, address, “GPGATS 1,1,ON; GPGATS 1,2,ON; GPGATS 2,1,ON”,
NLend)

‘set gate times and active gate


Call Send(boardid, address, “GPTIMST 1,1,0.5U; GPTIMST 1,2,10.5U; GPTIMST 2,1,1U;
GPTIMSP 1,1,1.5U; GPTIMSP 1,2,11.5U; GPTIMSP 2,11U; GPACTN 1,1; GPACTN 2,1”,
NLend)

‘set markers
Call Send(boardid, address, “MKACTN 1,1; MKTMIN 1”, NLend)

‘set trigger capture time and edge


Call Send(boardid, address, “TRCAPT 1,PMOD,20U; TRCAPT 1,PMOD,RISE”, NLend)

‘set averaging mode


Call Send(boardid, address, “PMAVGS 1,ON; PMAVGN 1,16”, NLend)

‘collect marker readings


Call Send(boardid, address, “MKACTO 1”, NLend)
Call Receive(boardid, address, buffer, STOPend)
mrk_data = buffer ‘transfers the buffer data to a global string
buffer = “” ‘clears the buffer

‘collect gate readings


Call Send(boardid, address, “GPMO 1”, NLend)
Call Receive(boardid, address, buffer, STOPend)

13000-00163 13-13
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Programming Examples

gate_data = buffer ‘transfers the buffer data to a global string


buffer = “” ‘clears the buffer

‘collect pulse repetition time readings


Call Send(boardid, address, “MKPRIO 2”, NLend)
Call Receive(boardid, address, buffer, STOPend)
mrk_rpt = buffer ‘transfers the buffer data to a global string
buffer = “” ‘clears the buffer

‘collect pulse repetition frequency readings


Call Send(boardid, address, “MKPRFO 2”, NLend)
Call Receive(boardid, address, buffer, STOPend)
mrk_rpf = buffer ‘transfers the buffer data to a global string
buffer = “” ‘clears the buffer

End Function

13-14 13000-00163
September 2005
Programming Examples ML248xA / ML249xA

Cal and Zero Operation Examples


Function CalZero
‘sets query toggle memory space
Dim query as Boolean

‘setting toggle
query = ??

‘calibrating and zeroing according to toggle


If query = True then
Call Send(boardid, address, “SNCAL A; SNZERO A; *OPC?”, NLend)
Do Until buffer = “1”
buffer = “”
Call Receive(boardid, address, buffer, STOPend)
Loop
txtResult.Text = “Operation complete. Sensor cal-ed and zeroed”
Else
Call Send(boardid, address, “*CLS”, NLend)
Call Send(boardid, address, “SNCAL A; SNZERO A; *OPC”, NLend)
Do Until Right$(buffer, 1) = 1 or Right$(buffer, 1) = 3 or Right$(buffer,
1) = 5 or Right$(buffer, 1) = 7 or Right$(buffer, 1) = 9
buffer = “”
Call Receive(boardid, address, buffer, STOPend)
Loop
txtResult.Text = “Operation complete. Sensor cal-ed and zeroed”
End If

End Function

13000-00163 13-15
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Programming Examples

13-16 13000-00163
September 2005
Appendix A. ML243xA Reference Table
This table below lists the full ML243xA GPIB command set in the first column and any
equivalent ML248xA / ML249xA GPIB command in the second column. A hyphen ‘-‘ in the
second column indicates that the ML243xA command is no longer supported on ML248xA
/ ML249xA power meters and no equivalent command exists (i.e., a command that
performs exactly the same operation). The third column provides suggestions on
alternative commands that can be used when no equivalent command exists or details of
the differences between the two commands.
ML243xA ML248xA / Alternative Commands / Notes
ML249xA
ADDR SYADDR
AVG - Refer to commands: CWAVG, PMAVGS,
PMAVGN
AVGLL -
AVGM - Refer to commands: CWAVG, PMAVGS,
PMAVGN
BAUTS -
BAUTT -
BUFF SYBUFS
CAL SNCAL
CFADJ SNCFADJ
CFCAL SNCFCAL
CFFRQ SNCFRQ Frequency range changed
CFSRC SNCFSRC
CFUADD SNCTADD Frequency range changed
CFUCT SNCTCLR
CFUID SNCTID
CFULD SNCTBIN
CFUNITS SNCFU
CFUPT SNCTPRE
CFURD SNCTBO
CFUSAV SNCTSAV
CFUSEL SNCTABN
CFUTBL SNCTNQ
CFUUSE SNCFUSE
CFUVLD SNCTAVL
CFVAL SNCFVAL
CHCFG CHCFG
CHRES CHRES
CHUNIT CHUNIT
CONT SYCONT
CUR - Refer to the following mode dependent
commands.
Pulsed Modulated Profile: MKSTATE,
MKPOS, MKACTN, MKAPOS
Statistics: TTMKS, TTMKPOS
CURLK - Refer to commands: MKDELTS, MKDLINK
CVSPF SNZSPF Frequency range changed
CVSPV SNZSPV Voltage range changed
CVSTF SNZSTF Frequency range changed

13000-00163 A-1
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA ML243xA Reference Table

ML243xA ML248xA / Alternative Commands / Notes


ML249xA
CVSTV SNZSTV Voltage range changed
DBLGHT - No battery support
DBLTIM - No battery support
DCONT - Refer to command: SYDLIT
DCONTD -
DCONTU -
DISP SYDISP
DPEAK - Refer to commands: CHPKS, CHPIRST
DTRGD - Refer to command: TRDLYT
DUTY - Refer to command: CWDUTY
DUTYS - Refer to command: CWDUTYS
EMUL -
ENTERR SYBEEPS
ERRLST SYERLST Data format changed
FAST SYFAST See command notes
FBEEP LMFBEEP
FHOLD LMFHOLD
FROFF -
FRST NVFRST
GMNMX - Refer to commands: PMMEAS, PMRDO,
GPAMO, GPNMO, GPMO
GPRST - Refer to commands: PMPDREP, PMPTRK,
PMPDRST
GRAUTO - Refer to command: PMPAUTO
GRAVG -
GRCP -
GRDATA -
GRDDT -
GRDRQ -
GRFS -
GRMD - Refer to commands: CHMODE, PMDTYP
GRPIX - Refer to command; PMPDREP
GRPRD -
GRPTP - Refer to command: TRDLYT
GRSWP - Refer to command: PMAVGN
GRSWR Refer to command: PMAVRST
GRSWS Refer to command: PMAVGS
GRTMM - Refer to command: PMPTRK
GRYB - Refer to commands: PMPSCAL, PMPREF
GRYT - Refer to commands: PMPSCAL, PMPREF
GT0 GT0
GT1 GT1
GT2 GT2
GTARM - Refer to command: TRARMD
GTDLY - Refer to command: TRDLYT
GTGW Refer to commands: GPGATS, GPTIMST,
GPTIMSP, GPFENS, GPFENST, GPFENSP
GTLVL Refer to command: TRINLEV
GTSRC Refer to command: TRSRC

A-2 13000-00163
September 2005
ML243xA Reference Table ML248xA / ML249xA

ML243xA ML248xA / Alternative Commands / Notes


ML249xA
GTTYP Refer to command: TRINEDG
GTXTTL Refer to command: TRXEDG
HLIM LMSUP Limits range has changed
HLIMS Refer to command: LMSTATE, LMLINE,
LMTYP
HOLD - Refer to command: CHOLD
IBBLP -
KEYCK SYTACTS
LINK - Refer to command: TRLINKS
LLIM LMSLO Limits range has changed
LLIMS Refer to command: LMSTATE, LMLINE,
LMTYP
MMRST CWMMRST Applies only to CW mode.
MNGDB - Refer to commands: PMNPBO,PMNPBLO
MNGD - Refer to command: PMNPO
MNMXS CWMMTKS Applies only to CW mode
MODDEL -
MODINIT -
MODLIM -
MODPH -
MODPWR -
MODRED -
MODRNG -
MXGDB - Refer to commands: PMXPBO,PMXPBLO
MXGD - Refer to command: PMXPO
O CWO Review command operation
OBACM -
OBCH BNOCH
OBDSP BNDSP Added dBW units
OBDST BNDST Added dBW units
OBMD - Refer to commands: BN1CM, BNC2M
OBPL BNPLEV
OBVSP BNVOSP
OBVST BNVOST
OBZL -
OFFCLR SNOTCLR
OFFFIX SNOFIX Offset Range has changed
OFFTBL SNOTSEL
OFFTBR - See SNOTBO, SNOTAO command
OFFTBU - See SNOTBW, SNOTAW command
OFFTYP SNOFTYP
OFFVAL SNOFVO
OGBD - Refer to command: PMPBO
OGD - Refer to command: PMPO
OGSD -
OI SYOI
ON CWON Returns also readings for both channels (ch
1&2)
OPMD - Refer to commands: CHMODE, PMDTYP

13000-00163 A-3
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA ML243xA Reference Table

ML243xA ML248xA / Alternative Commands / Notes


ML249xA
PRINT -
PRNSEL -
RCD RCD See also additional Range Calibrator
commands
REL CWREL Applies only to CW mode
RFCAL SNRFCAL
RGH SNRGH New ranges + range selection channel mode
dependent. Pulsed/Modulated: AUTO | 7 to 9
CW: AUTO | 1 to 6
RSBAUD SYBAUD Added 57.6 kbits per second
RSMODE -
SECURE NVSECS
SENMM -
SENMO SNUNIVM
SENSTL CWSETLP
SENTYP SNTYPE
SRCMOD -
SRCSPFRQ -
SRCSPPWR -
SRCSTAT -
SRCSTFRQ -
SRCSTPWR -
START SYSTART
STATUS SYSTATE Data format has changed
STERR SYTEST Data format has changed
SYSLD NVLOAD Number of stores extended to 20
SYSLNM NVNAME
SYSRD NVOUT Number of stores extended to 20
TEXT SYTEXT
TEXTS SYTEXTS
TR0 TR0
TR1 TR1 Totally new operation. Review command
description.
TR2 TR2 Totally new operation. Review command
description.
TR3 TR3
TRGARM - Refer to command: TRARMD
TRGDLY - Refer to command: TRDLYT
TRGGW - Refer to commands: GPGATS, GPTIMST,
GPTIMSP, GPFENS, GPFENST, GPFENSP
TRGLVL - Refer to command: TRINLEV
TRGMODE - Refer to command: TRLINKS
TRGSRC Refer to command: TRSRC
TRGTYP Refer to command: TRINEDG
TRGXTTL Refer to command: TRXEDG
VZERO BNVZERO
ZERO SNZERO

A-4 13000-00163
September 2005
Appendix B. Binary Output Decoding Examples
Pulsed/Modulated Profile Binary to Float Conversion using Visual
Basic
This example in Visual Basic shows how to convert profile data from binary to floating
point format for the GPIB command PMPBO. Replace the string in the Send() function to
PMXPBO or PMNPBO to obtain minimum or maximum profile data.
' DATA VARIABLES AND FUNCTION DEFINITION SHOULD BE PLACED IN A
' VISUAL BASIC MODULE
' The function GetBinaryGraphData()converts the graph data points
' from binary format to floating point format.

' Graph Data


Public GraphArray(1 To 200) As Single

' conversion types for binary output


Public Type FloatBox
Datbox As Single
End Type

Public Type longBox


Datbox(0 To 3) As Byte
End Type

' Function Definition:


' Paramter 1: GPIBBoard is the GPIB board identification (usually
' 0)
' Paramter 2: MT248x_Addr is the power meter GPIB address (default
' 13)
' Paramter 3: Channel is the target Pulsed/Modulated Profile
' channel (1 | 2 | 1&2)
'
Public Function GetBinaryGraphData(GPIBBoard As Integer,
MT248x_Addr As Integer, Channel As Integer) As Boolean

' required to convert binary to floating point variable


Dim longval As longBox
Dim floatval As FloatBox

Dim c As Integer
Dim start As Integer
Dim size As Integer
Dim pos As Integer
Dim byten As Integer
Dim Point As Integer

Dim GPIBbuff As String * 4095


Dim buffer As String

Dim ByteShift(0 to 3) as integer

' Shift the bytes as the byte format output of MT248x is rotated
ByteShift(0) = 2 ' byte 0 becomes byte 2
ByteShift(1) = 3 ' byte 1 becomes byte 3

13000-00163 B-1
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Binary Output Decoding Examples

ByteShift(2) = 1 ' byte 2 becomes byte 1


ByteShift(3) = 0 ' byte 3 becomes byte 0

Call Send(GPIBBoard_Addr, MT248x_Addr, "PMPBO " & Channel,NLend)


Call Receive(GPIBBoard_Addr, MT2488x_Addr, GPIBbuff, STOPend)

' check if we have the correct data


If (ibsta And EERR) = EERR Then Exit Function

' move our starting position to the correct place in the GPIB
' returned data string
buffer = Left(GPIBbuff, ibcntl - 1)
pos = InStr(buffer, "#") + 1
size = Mid(buffer, pos + 1, Mid(buffer, pos, 1))
start = pos + Mid(buffer, pos, 1)

' go through the binary data, 4bytes at a time


For pos = 1 To size Step 4

' go through each byte in the 4bytes block


For byten = 0 To 3

' convert byte value into integer


c = Asc(Mid(buffer, start + pos + byten, 1))

' place the byte into the correct position in the convertion
' array
longval.Datbox(ByteShift(byten)) = c

Next byten

' cast the longval array into a floating point value


LSet floatval = longval

' increase our graph points position


Point = Point + 1

' Set the graph array position to this value from our floatval
' type
GraphArray(Point) = floatval.Datbox

Next pos

' return success!


GetBinaryGraphData = True

End Function

B-2 13000-00163
September 2005
Binary Output Decoding Examples ML248xA / ML249xA

Pulsed/Modulated Profile Binary to Float Conversion using


Microsoft Visual C
/*
** This function reads Pulsed/Modulated profile measurements in
** binary format and converts to single precision floating
** point reading to 3 decimal digits. To extract floating point
** readings correctly, binary data bytes MUST be re-arranged to
** convert from c165 16-bit little-endian to 32-bit little endian.
** NOTE: This function assumes that the ReadBuffer[] array is
** declared global and contains the binary data to be decoded. The
** data string to be decoded is formatted as follows:
** PMPBO <c>,<#><length><num_bytes><data_byte_1>...<data_byte_n>
** In this specific example the converted data and measurements
** are written to a file using the C stream standard library
** functions
*/
void Convert__Binary_Meas_Data(void)
{
int x = 0;
int i = 0;

// char pointer used for assembly of float value


char *pCF;
float fval;
char tempBuff[100];
char sNumChars[10];
int numDig = 0;
int totalBytes;

// extract mnemonic header + channel


while(1)
{
if (ReadBuffer[x] == ',')
{
tempBuff[x] = '\0';
fprintf( fp,"%s\n",tempBuff); // write header to file
x++; // skip comma separator
break;

}
tempBuff[x] = ReadBuffer[x];
x++;
}

//find # separating character


while(1)
{
if (ReadBuffer[x] == '#')
{
x++;
break;
}
x++;
}

13000-00163 B-3
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Binary Output Decoding Examples

// read <length> field, how many digits to read next


sNumChars[0] = ReadBuffer[x++];
sNumChars[1] = '\0'; // null terminate as a string
numDig = atoi(sNumChars); // convert to integer

// numDig to how many bytes to expect in measurement data


for (i=0; i<numDig; i++)
{
sNumChars[i] = ReadBuffer[x++];
}
sNumChars[i] = '\0'; // null terminate as a string

// totalBytes is the number of binary data bytes we must read


totalBytes = atoi(sNumChars);

// initialise pointer pCF to variable fval. pCF can now access


// any byte in fval in any order
pCF = (char *)&fval;

// copy each byte from data buffer at the specified offset to


// obtain a floating point reading
for ( i=0; i<totalBytes; i+=4)
{
// switch least significant word to most significant word,
// keep little endian format
*(pCF + 2) = ReadBuffer[x++];
*(pCF + 3) = ReadBuffer[x++];
*(pCF + 0) = ReadBuffer[x++];
*(pCF + 1) = ReadBuffer[x++];

// write floating point value to file


fprintf( fp,"%.3f ",fval);

fprintf( fp,"%c",'\n'); // move to newline


pCF = (char *)&fval; // re-initialise pointer
}
}

B-4 13000-00163
September 2005
Binary Output Decoding Examples ML248xA / ML249xA

Offset Tables Binary to Float Conversion using Microsoft Visual C


This example in C using Microsoft Visual Studio shows how to convert Offset Table data
from binary format to floating point 32-bit little-endian format. The binary data is acquired
by sending the command GPIB SNOTBO command.

/* GLOBAL VARIABLES DECLARATION */


typedef union
{
char cval[4];
float fval;
short ival;
long lval;
} data_bytes;

char buffer[4096]; // gpib data array


float real_freq[200]; // 200 offset table entries maximum
float real_offset[200];
float real_cal[200];
data_bytes bin_data;

/*
** This function decodes binary formatted offset table data.
** In this example the function expect the binary data to be held
** in the global character array buffer. The binary data acquired
** from the instrument will be in the following format:
** SNOTBO #<length><num_bytes>,<bin_data_block>
** where:
** <length> The number of characters in the <num_bytes>
** field
** <num_bytes> The number of bytes in <bin_data_block>,
** following the comma (,)
** <bin_data_block> <id_string><num_entries><offset_tbl_entries>
** where:
** <id_string> 10 bytes (9 for the identity, plus a
NULL
** terminator byte)
** <num_entries> 2 bytes representing the number of
table
** entry pairs
** <offset_tbl_entries> <element1> … <elementN>
** where:
** <elementN> 8-byte frequency/power-offset values
*/
void decode_bin_offset_table(void)
{
int count;
long *bin_value;
char *cptr;
char ch_val[6];
int length;

// Decode header
cptr = strtok(&buffer[0],"#"); // Find # character
cptr = strtok(NULL,"#");

13000-00163 B-5
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Binary Output Decoding Examples

// Get the number of characters for binary length, null


// terminate and convert to integer
ch_val[0] = *cptr++;
ch_val[1] = NULL;

// count is the number of characters to expect next


count = atoi(&ch_val[0]);

// Get binary data length field, and convert to integer


for (loop = 0; loop < count; loop++)
{
ch_val[loop] = *cptr++;
}
ch_val[count] = NULL;

// length value is how many data bytes are in the buffer


length = atoi(&ch_val[0]);

*cptr++; // skip the comma character

// The binary offset table may contain up to 200 sets


// frequency-power entry pairs. Each element of a single entry
// pair (e.g. frequency or power)is represented by a 4-byte
// single precision floating point number. To extract data
// correctly we must re-order each byte to form a floating point
// number in 32-bit little-endian format
count = 0;
loop = 0;
while (count < length)
{
// Frequency conversion
bin_data.cval[2] = *cptr++;
bin_data.cval[3] = *cptr++;
bin_data.cval[0] = *cptr++;
bin_data.cval[1] = *cptr++;
real_freq[loop] = bin_data.fval;
// dB conversion
bin_data.cval[2] = *cptr++;
bin_data.cval[3] = *cptr++;
bin_data.cval[0] = *cptr++;
bin_data.cval[1] = *cptr++;
real_offset[loop++] = bin_data.fval;
count += 8;
}
}

B-6 13000-00163
September 2005
Binary Output Decoding Examples ML248xA / ML249xA

Cal Factor Tables Binary to Float Conversion using Microsoft


Visual C
This example in C using Microsoft Visual Studio shows how to convert Cal Factor Table
data from binary format to floating point 32-bit little-endian format. The binary data is
acquired by sending the command GPIB SNCTBO command.

/* GLOBAL VARIABLES DECLARATION */


typedef union
{
char cval[4];
float fval;
short ival;
long lval;
} data_bytes;

char buffer[4096]; // gpib data array


float real_freq[200]; // 200 offset table entries maximum
float real_offset[200];
float real_cal[200];
data_bytes bin_data;

/*
** This function decodes binary formatted cal factor table data.
** In this example the function expect the binary data to be held
** in the global character array buffer. The binary data acquired
** from the instrument will be in the following format:
** SNCTBO<ws><bin_data_len><,><bin_data_block>
** where:
** <bin_data_len> Total length in bytes of <bin_data_block>
** <bin_data_block> <id_string><num_entries><cal_factor_entries>
** where:
** <id_string> 8 bytes (7 for the identity, plus a NULL
** terminator byte)
** <num_entries> 2 bytes representing the table number of
** entry pairs
** <cal_factor_entries> The frequency/cal_factor data pairs
** in binary
format
*/
void Decode_Bin_Cal_Factor_Table(void)
{
int data_idx = 0, count = 0, val_cnt = 0, loop;
int length, table_entries;
char arr_ch[6], ident[10], ch;
char *cptr;
float freq, cal;

// skip header 'SNCTBO ' by 7 chars


data_idx = 7;

// read binary data length field and convert to integer


while(1)
{
ch = buffer[data_idx];
if(ch == ',')

13000-00163 B-7
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Binary Output Decoding Examples

break;
arr_ch[count++] = ch;
data_idx++;
}
arr_ch[data_idx] = '\0';
length = atoi(arr_ch);

// skip one byte to set pointer after the comma


data_idx++;
cptr = &buffer[data_idx];

// Read the table identity character string, max 8 chars


count = 8;
for (loop = 0; loop < count; loop++)
{
ident[loop] = *cptr++;
length = length - 1;
}
ident[count] = '\0';

// Read number of entries


bin_data.cval[0] = *cptr++;
bin_data.cval[1] = *cptr++;
bin_data.cval[2] = 0;
bin_data.cval[3] = 0;
table_entries = bin_data.ival;
length = length - 2;

// cal factor table frequency/cal_factor pairs are encoded as:


// frequency: 32768.0e-6 * LONG INTEGER (4 bytes)
// cal factor: 1024 * INTEGER (2 bytes)
count = 0;
while (count < length)
{
// Frequency conversion
bin_data.cval[0] = *cptr++;
bin_data.cval[1] = *cptr++;
bin_data.cval[2] = *cptr++;
bin_data.cval[3] = *cptr++;
freq = ((float)(bin_data.lval))/(float)32768e-6;

// dB conversion
bin_data.cval[0] = *cptr++;
bin_data.cval[1] = *cptr++;
bin_data.cval[2] = 0;
bin_data.cval[3] = 0;
cal = ((float)(bin_data.ival))/(float)1024.0;
count += 6;

// write results to a file


fprintf( fp,"%.2f ",freq);
fprintf( fp,"%c ",',');
fprintf( fp,"%.2f ",cal);
fprintf( fp,"%c",'\n');
}

B-8 13000-00163
September 2005
Appendix C. GPIB PC Card Set-up
The following GPIB driver configuration set up is recommended for reliable GPIB
communication with the ML248xA / ML249xA. The set up is expressed in the terms used
by the National Instruments GPIB ISA and PCI cards and drivers for Windows and DOS.

GPIB Card Settings


The recommended GPIB board settings are as follows:
Terminate read on EOS NO
Set EOI with EOS on write YES
Type of compare on EOS 8 bit
Send EOI at end of write YES
EOS byte 10 (0x0A hexadecimal)
System controller YES
Assert REN when SC YES
Enable Auto serial polling NO
NI card. Cable length for HS488 Disabled

GPIB Device Template


The ML248xA / ML249xA GPIB Default Primary Address is 13. If you decide to use this
Primary Address you need to select Device 13 (DEV13) from the ‘Device Template’ list.
Once selected you select ‘Configure’ to modify the Device configuration as follows:
Primary Address 13
Secondary address NONE
Terminate Read on EOS YES
Set EOI with EOS on Write YES
Type of Compare on EOS 8-bit
Send EOI at end of Write YES
EOS Byte 10 (0x0A hexadecimal)
Repeat Addressing YES

13000-00163 C-1
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA GPIB PC Card Set-up

C-2 13000-00163
September 2005
Appendix D. Terminology Glossary
Item Explanation

Action Commands A command mnemonic used to carry out a specific action


(e.g. zoom in / out).

CIC The controller (usually a PC) in charge of controlling and co-


ordinating communication with devices attached to the GPIB
bus.
Command Unit A complete command formatted with parameters and
terminators.
Configuration Commands issued to instrument that change a specific
Commands instrument configuration.
Data Acquisition Commands used to obtain measurement data from
Commands instrument.
GPIB General Purpose Interface Bus
GPIB Controller A device in charge of controlling and co-ordinating
communication with devices attached to the GPIB bus.
IEEE 488.1 The original GPIB specification.
IEEE 488.2 The second GPIB specification that built on the original by
defining a minimum set of device interface, a common set of
data codes and formats, a device message protocol, and a
status reporting model.
Message A sequence of commands used together to configure the
instrument in a specified manner.
Mnemonic The GPIB command name, e.g., CHACTIV
Query Command A command mnemonic used to request information from the
instrument. A query command mnemonic is usually the
same as the Set Command with a question mark appended.
Set Command A command mnemonic that changes a specific configuration
setting.
Terminator A specific action used to indicate the termination of a GPIB
message string.

13000-00163 D-1
September 2005
ML248xA / ML249xA Terminology Glossary

D-2 13000-00163
September 2005
Index
B G
BNC1M command, xi, 8-6 GP1REPN command, vii, 5-27
BNC2M command, xi, 8-7 GP1REPS command, vii, 5-27
BNDSP command, xi, 8-8 GP1REPT command, vii, 5-28
BNDST command, xi, 8-9 GPACTN command, vii, 5-28
BNOCH command, xi, 8-10 GPAMO command, vii, 5-29
BNPLEV command, xi, 8-10 GPARST command, vii, 5-31
BNVOSP command, xi, 8-11 GPFENS command, vii, 5-31
BNVOST command, xi, 8-11 GPFENSP command, vii, 5-32
BNVZERO command, xi, 7-2 GPFENST command, vii, 5-32
GPGATS command, vii, 5-33
C GPHIDES command, vii, 5-33
GPIB - 488.2 status registers, v, 2-5
CHACTIV command, vi, 5-6 GPIB - buffering, v, 2-11
CHCFG command, vi, 5-7 GPIB - controller card setup, v, 2-1
CHDISPN command, vi, 5-8 GPIB - PC card set-up, xiii, 1-3, C-1
CHMODE command, vi, 5-8 GPIB on RS232, v, 2-12
CHOLD command, ix, 5-83 GPMO command, vii, 5-34
CHPIRST command, ix, 5-84 GPNMO command, vii, 5-36
CHPKS command, ix, 5-84 GPOFF command, vii, 5-38
CHRES command, vi, 5-9 GPRS measurement example, xii, 13-8
CHUNIT command, vi, 5-10 GPTIMSP command, vii, 5-39
CLS Command, vi, 3-2 GPTIMST command, vii, 5-39
command format, v, 2-1 GSM measurement example, xii, 13-6
configuration commands, v, 2-3, D-1 GT0 command, vi, 4-2
controller termination, v, 2-2 GT1 command, vi, 4-2
CW measurement example, xii, 13-2 GT2 command, vi, 4-2
CWAVG command, vii, 5-41
CWDUTY command, vii, 5-44 I
CWDUTYS command, vii, 5-44
CWMMRST command, ix, 5-80 IDN? command, vi, 3-4
CWMMTKS command, ix, 5-80
CWO command, xii, 10-2 L
CWON command, xii, 10-3
CWREL command, vii, 5-40 LMFBEEP command, viii, 5-62
CWSETLP command, vi, 5-11 LMFCLR command, viii, 5-62
LMFHOLD command, viii, 5-63
D LMLINE command, viii, 5-63
LMSLO command, viii, 5-64
data I/O formats, v, 2-3 LMSTATE command, viii, 5-64
device termination, v, 2-2 LMSUP command, viii, 5-65
dual channel set up example, xiii, 13-13 LMTYP command, viii, 5-65
LMXNAME command, viii, 5-66
E LMXPOF command, viii, 5-67
LMXREPN command, viii, 5-67
EDGE measurement example, xii, 13-4 LMXREPS command, viii, 5-68
Event status bit – using in Status Byte LMXROFP command, viii, 5-68
Register, v, 2-9 LMXROFT command, viii, 5-69
Event Status Enable Register, vi, 3-2 LMXSAVE command, viii, 5-69
Event Status Register Query, vi, 3-4 LMXSEG command, viii, 5-70
LMXSID command, viii, 5-71
LMXSPEC command, ix, 5-72 P
LMXSPEF command, ix, 5-73
LMXSPO command, ix, 5-75 PAEBI command, ix, 5-92
LMXTOF command, ix, 5-77 PAEBICF command, ix, 5-92
PAEBIS command, ix, 5-93
PAEBV command, ix, 5-93
M PAECFG command, x, 5-94
manual - associated documents, v, 1-4 PAEO command, x, 5-94
manual - purpose and scope of this PAESRC command, x, 5-95
manual, v, 1-1 PMAVGN command, vii, 5-42
Message available bit - using in Status PMAVGS command, vii, 5-43
Byte Register, v, 2-11 PMAVRST command, vii, 5-43
MKACTN command, viii, 5-45 PMDTYP command, vi, 5-12
MKACTO command, viii, 5-46 PMMEAS command, vi, 5-13
MKAOFF command, viii, 5-47 PMNPBLO command, xii, 10-4
MKAPOS command, viii, 5-47 PMNPBO command, xii, 10-6
MKDELTS command, viii, 5-48 PMNPO command, xii, 10-8
MKDLINK command, viii, 5-49 PMPAUTO command, ix, 5-78
MKDMEAS command, viii, 5-49 PMPBLO command, xii, 10-9
MKDO command, viii, 5-50 PMPBO command, xii, 10-11
MKDPOS command, viii, 5-51 PMPDREP command, ix, 5-81
MKENO command, viii, 5-52 PMPDRST command, vii, 5-43
MKNO command, viii, 5-53 PMPO command, xii, 10-12
MKPFTO command, viii, 5-54 PMPREF command, ix, 5-78
MKPOS command, viii, 5-55 PMPSCAL command, ix, 5-79
MKPOTO command, viii, 5-56 PMPTRK command, ix, 5-82
MKPRIO command, viii, 5-57 PMRDO command, xii, 10-13
MKPRTO command, viii, 5-58 PMRRS? command, vi, 5-14
MKPSLT command, viii, 5-58 PMXPBLO command, xii, 10-15
MKPSSV command, viii, 5-59 PMXPBO command, xii, 10-17
MKPSUT command, viii, 5-59 PMXPO command, xii, 10-18
MKPWTO command, viii, 5-60 PPACQRT command, ix, 5-85
MKSTATE command, viii, 5-61 PPACQS command, ix, 5-85
MKTMAX command, viii, 5-61 PPFUNC command, ix, 5-86
MKTMIN command, viii, 5-61 programming examples, xii, 1-3, 13-1
ML243xa - reference table, xiii, 1-3, A-1
mnemonics, vi, 2-14 Q
multiple RADAR pulse measurement
example, xiii, 13-10 query commands, v, 2-4
quick reference tables, v, 1-5


NVAPN command, xii, 9-2
NVFRST command, xii, 9-3 RCABORT command, xii, 12-2
NVLOAD command, xi, 8-3 RCD command, xii, 12-2
NVNAME command, xi, 8-4 RCDIAGO command, xii, 12-3
NVOUT command, xi, 8-5 RCDIAGT command, xii, 12-4
NVSECS command, xii, 8-22 RCTEST command, xii, 12-5
RCZERO command, xii, 12-6
RS232 commands, v, 2-13
O RST command, vi, 3-5
OPC command, vi, 3-5

Service Request Enable Register, v, 2-
5
SNCAL command, xi, 7-2 SYFAST command, xii, 11-5
SNCALF command, xi, 7-3 SYIMAGE command, xi, 8-17
SNCFADJ command, x, 6-5 SYLUT command, xi, 8-18
SNCFCAL command, x, 6-6 SYOI command, 8-22
SNCFRQ command, x, 6-6 SYSTART command, xii, 11-6
SNCFSRC command, x, 6-7 SYSTATE command, xii, 11-7
SNCFU command, x, 6-8 SYSTEP command, xi, 8-19
SNCFUSE command, x, 6-23 SYTACTS command, xi, 8-20
SNCTABN command, x, 6-23 SYTEST command, xii, 11-15
SNCTADD command, x, 6-24 SYTEXT command, xi, 8-20
SNCTAO command, x, 6-25 SYTEXTS command, xi, 8-21
SNCTAW command, x, 6-26
SNCTBIN command, x, 6-27 T
SNCTBO command, x, 6-28
SNCTCLR command, x, 6-29 terminology glossary, xiii, 1-3, D-1
SNCTID command, xi, 6-29 TR0 command, vi, 4-2
SNCTNQ command, 6-30 TR1 command, vi, 4-3
SNCTPRE command, xi, 6-30 TR2 command, vi, 4-6
SNCTSAV command, xi, 6-30 TR3 command, vi, 4-8
SNCTVAL command, xi, 6-31 TRARMD command, vi, 5-14
SNFILTS command, x, 6-3 TRAUTOS command, vi, 5-15
SNOFIX command, x, 6-12 TRBW command, vi, 5-16
SNOFTYP command, x, 6-13 TRCAPT command, vi, 5-17
SNOFVO command, x, 6-13 TRDLYT command, vi, 5-18
SNOTADD command, x, 6-16 TRFLEV command, vii, 5-19
SNOTAO command, x, 6-14 TRFTIM command, vii, 5-20
SNOTAW command, x, 6-15 TRG command, vi, 3-7
SNOTBO command, x, 6-17 TRHOFS command, vii, 5-21
SNOTBW command, x, 6-19 TRHOFT command, vii, 5-21
SNOTCLR command, x, 6-20 TRINEDG command, vii, 5-22
SNOTID command, x, 6-20 TRINLEV command, vii, 5-22
SNOTSEL command, x, 6-21 TRLINKS command, vii, 5-23
SNOTVLD command, x, 6-22 TRSAMPL command, vii, 5-24
SNRFCAL command, xi, 7-3 TRSRC command, vii, 5-25
SNRGH command, xi, 6-32 TRWFPOS command, vii, 5-25
SNTYPE command, x, 6-3 TRWFS command, vii, 5-26
SNUNIVM command, x, 6-4 TRXEDG command, vii, 5-26
SNZERO command, xi, 7-4 TST? command, vi, 3-8
SNZSPF command, x, 6-10 TTFRO command, ix, 5-87
SNZSPV command, x, 6-10 TTFUNC command, ix, 5-88
SNZSTF command, x, 6-11 TTMKPOS command, ix, 5-88
SNZSTV command, x, 6-11 TTMKRO command, ix, 5-89
software - versions, v, 1-1 TTMKS command, ix, 5-90
SRE command, vi, 3-6 TTPSP command, ix, 5-90
Standard Event Registers, v, 2-7 TTPST command, ix, 5-91
Status Byte Register, v, 2-5 TTSRC command, ix, 5-91
STB? command, vi, 3-7 TTZIN command, ix, 5-91
suffix conventions, v, 2-3 TTZOUT command, ix, 5-92
SYADDR command, xi, 8-12
SYBAUD command, xi, 8-12

SYBEEPS command, xi, 8-13
SYBUFS command, xi, 8-13 WAI command, vi, 3-8
SYCONT command, xii, 11-2 WCDMA measurement example, xiii,
SYDISP command, xii, 11-2 13-12
SYDLIT command, xi, 8-14 WLAN measurement example, xiii, 13-
SYDRES command, xi, 8-15 11
AUSTRALIA Brazil CANADA
ANRITSU PTY. LTD. ANRITSU ELETRONICA LTDA. 700 Silver Seven Road, Suite 120, Kanata,
Unit 3, 170 Foster Road Praca Amadeu Amaral, 27 - 1 Andar ON K2V 1C3,
Mt Waverley, VIC 3149 01327-010 - Paraiso - Sao Paulo – Canada
Australia Brazil Telephone: +1-800-267-4878
Telephone: +61-3-9558-8177 Telephone: +55-11-3283-2511 Fax: +1-613-591-1006
Fax: +61-3-9558--8255 Fax: +55-21-288-6940

CHINA FINLAND FRANCE


Room 1515, Beijing Fortune Building Teknobulevardi 3-5 Z.A de Courtaboeuf 1,
No. 5, Dong-San-Huan Bei Road FI-01530 Vantaa Avenue du Québec
Chao-Yang District Finland 91951 Les Ulis Cedex
Beijing 10004 Telephone: +358 9 435 522 0 France
P.R. China Fax: +358 9 435 522 50 Telephone: +33 1.60.92.15.50
Telephone: (86-10) 6590 9230 - 9234 Fax: +33 1.64.46.10.65
Fax : (86-10) 6590 9235

GERMANY HONG KONG ITALY


ANRITSU GmbH ANRITSU COMPANY LTD. ANRITSU Sp.A
Konrad-Zuse-Platz 1 Suite 923, 9/F., Chinachem Gloden Plaza Via Elio Vittorini, 129, 00144 Roma EUR,
81829 München 77 Mody Road Italy
Germany Hong Kong Telephone: +39-06-509-9711
Telephone: +49 (0)89 4423080 Telephone.: (852) 2301 4980 Fax: +39-06-502-24-25
Fax: +49 (0)89 44230855 Fax : (852) 2301 3545

JAPAN KOREA SINGAPORE


1800 Onna, Atsugi-shi, ANRITSU CORPORATION LTD. 10, Hoe Chiang Road, # 07-01/02
Kanagawa 243-8555 8/F, Hyunjuk Building, 832-41 Keppel Towers
Japan Yeoksam Dong Singapore 089315
Telephone: +81-46-223-1111 Seoul 135-080 Telephone: +65-282 2400
Fax: +81-120-542-425 Korea Fax : +65- 282 2533
Telephone: (82-2) 553 6603
Fax : (82-2) 553 6604~5

SWEDEN TAIWAN UNITED KINGDOM


Anritsu AB ANRITSU CO., LTD. Anritsu Limited
Borgarfjordsgatan 13A 7F, NO.316, Sec.1 NeiHu Rd., Taipei, 200 Capability Green
164 40 KISTA Taiwan, R.O.C Luton
SWEDEN Telephone: +886-2-8751-1816 Bedfordshire
Telephone: +46 (0) 8-534 707 00 Fax: +886-2-8751-1817 LU1 3LU
Fax: +46 (0) 8-534 707 30 Telephone: +44 (0)1582 433200
Fax: +44 (0)1582 731303

UNITED STATES
1155 East Collins Blvd., Richardson, TX
75081,
U.S.A.
Toll Free: 1-800-ANRITSU (267-4878)
Telephone: +1-972-644-1777
Fax: +1-972-671-1877

You might also like